ld: Orphan section documentation
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
832 @item -plugin @var{name}
833 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837 wish.
838
839 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845 just copy in the newest one.
846
847 @kindex --push-state
848 @cindex push state governing input file handling
849 @item --push-state
850 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864 something as follows:
865
866 @smallexample
867 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868 @end smallexample
869
870 @kindex --pop-state
871 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
872 @item --pop-state
873 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874 flags governing input file handling.
875
876 @kindex -q
877 @kindex --emit-relocs
878 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
879 @item -q
880 @itemx --emit-relocs
881 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
882 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884 in larger executables.
885
886 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
888 @kindex --force-dynamic
889 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890 @item --force-dynamic
891 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892 to VxWorks targets.
893
894 @cindex partial link
895 @cindex relocatable output
896 @kindex -r
897 @kindex --relocatable
898 @item -r
899 @itemx --relocatable
900 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
901 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
902 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904 @code{OMAGIC}.
905 @c ; see @option{-N}.
906 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
910 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914 with input files in other formats at all.
915
916 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918 @kindex -R @var{file}
919 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920 @cindex symbol-only input
921 @item -R @var{filename}
922 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926 programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
928 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
929 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
930 the @option{-rpath} option.
931
932 @kindex -s
933 @kindex --strip-all
934 @cindex strip all symbols
935 @item -s
936 @itemx --strip-all
937 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939 @kindex -S
940 @kindex --strip-debug
941 @cindex strip debugger symbols
942 @item -S
943 @itemx --strip-debug
944 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946 @kindex -t
947 @kindex --trace
948 @cindex input files, displaying
949 @item -t
950 @itemx --trace
951 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
952
953 @kindex -T @var{script}
954 @kindex --script=@var{script}
955 @cindex script files
956 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
957 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
958 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
959 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
960 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
961 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
962 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
963 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
964 options accumulate.
965
966 @kindex -dT @var{script}
967 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
968 @cindex script files
969 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
970 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
971 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
972
973 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
974 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
975 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
976 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
977 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
978 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
979 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
980 @samp{gcc}).
981
982 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
983 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
984 @cindex undefined symbol
985 @item -u @var{symbol}
986 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
987 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
988 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
989 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
990 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
991 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
992
993 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
994 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
995 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
996 instead.
997
998 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
999 @cindex symbols, require defined
1000 @cindex defined symbol
1001 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1002 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1003 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1004 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1005 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1006 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1007 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1008
1009 @kindex -Ur
1010 @cindex constructors
1011 @item -Ur
1012 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1013 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1014 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1015 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1016 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1017 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1018 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1019 @samp{-r} for the others.
1020
1021 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1022 @cindex orphan sections
1023 @cindex sections, orphan
1024 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1025 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1026 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1027
1028 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1029
1030 @table @code
1031 @item place
1032 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1033 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1034 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1035
1036 @item discard
1037 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1038 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1039
1040 @item warn
1041 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1042 issue a warning.
1043
1044 @item error
1045 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1046 @end table
1047
1048 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1049
1050 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1051 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1052 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1053 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1054 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1055 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1056 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1057 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1058 in a linker script.
1059
1060 @kindex -v
1061 @kindex -V
1062 @kindex --version
1063 @cindex version
1064 @item -v
1065 @itemx --version
1066 @itemx -V
1067 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1068 lists the supported emulations.
1069
1070 @kindex -x
1071 @kindex --discard-all
1072 @cindex deleting local symbols
1073 @item -x
1074 @itemx --discard-all
1075 Delete all local symbols.
1076
1077 @kindex -X
1078 @kindex --discard-locals
1079 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1080 @item -X
1081 @itemx --discard-locals
1082 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1083 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1084 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1085
1086 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1087 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1088 @cindex symbol tracing
1089 @item -y @var{symbol}
1090 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1091 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1092 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1093 to prepend an underscore.
1094
1095 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1096 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1097
1098 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1099 @item -Y @var{path}
1100 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1101 for Solaris compatibility.
1102
1103 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1104 @item -z @var{keyword}
1105 The recognized keywords are:
1106 @table @samp
1107
1108 @item combreloc
1109 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1110 lookup caching possible.
1111
1112 @item common
1113 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1114 link.
1115
1116 @item defs
1117 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1118 shared libraries are still allowed.
1119
1120 @item execstack
1121 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1122
1123 @item global
1124 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1125 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1126 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1127
1128 @item initfirst
1129 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1130 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1131 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1132 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1133 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1134 objects.
1135
1136 @item interpose
1137 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1138 but the primary executable.
1139
1140 @item lazy
1141 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1142 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1143 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1144 Lazy binding is the default.
1145
1146 @item loadfltr
1147 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1148 runtime.
1149
1150 @item muldefs
1151 Allows multiple definitions.
1152
1153 @item nocombreloc
1154 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1155
1156 @item nocommon
1157 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1158 link.
1159
1160 @item nocopyreloc
1161 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1162 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1163
1164 @item nodefaultlib
1165 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1166 ignore any default library search paths.
1167
1168 @item nodelete
1169 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1170
1171 @item nodlopen
1172 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1173
1174 @item nodump
1175 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1176
1177 @item noexecstack
1178 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1179
1180 @item text
1181 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1182
1183 @item notext
1184 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1185
1186 @item textoff
1187 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1188
1189 @item norelro
1190 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1191
1192 @item now
1193 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1194 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1195 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1196 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1197 first called.
1198
1199 @item origin
1200 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1201
1202 @item relro
1203 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1204
1205 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1206 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1207
1208 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1209 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1210
1211 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1212 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1213 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1214 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1215
1216 @item bndplt
1217 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item noextern-protected-data
1220 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1221 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1222 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1223 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1224 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1225 i386 and x86-64.
1226
1227 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1228 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1229 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1230 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1231 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1232
1233 @item noreloc-overflow
1234 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1235 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1236 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1237
1238 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1239 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1240 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1241 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1242 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1243 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1244 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1245 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1246 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1247 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1248 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1249 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1250 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1251
1252 @end table
1253
1254 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1255
1256 @kindex -(
1257 @cindex groups of archives
1258 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1259 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1260 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1261 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1262
1263 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1264 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1265 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1266 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1267 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1268 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1269 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1270 resolved.
1271
1272 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1273 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1274 more archives.
1275
1276 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1277 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1278 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1279 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1280 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1281 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1282 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1283 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1284 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1285 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1286 restore the old behaviour.
1287
1288 @kindex --as-needed
1289 @kindex --no-as-needed
1290 @item --as-needed
1291 @itemx --no-as-needed
1292 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1293 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1294 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1295 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1296 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1297 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1298 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1299 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1300 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1301 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1302 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1303 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1304 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1305
1306 @kindex --add-needed
1307 @kindex --no-add-needed
1308 @item --add-needed
1309 @itemx --no-add-needed
1310 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1311 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1312 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1313 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1314
1315 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1316 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1317 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1318
1319 @kindex -Bdynamic
1320 @kindex -dy
1321 @kindex -call_shared
1322 @item -Bdynamic
1323 @itemx -dy
1324 @itemx -call_shared
1325 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1326 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1327 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1328 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1329 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1330 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1331
1332 @kindex -Bgroup
1333 @item -Bgroup
1334 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1335 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1336 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1337 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1338 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1339
1340 @kindex -Bstatic
1341 @kindex -dn
1342 @kindex -non_shared
1343 @kindex -static
1344 @item -Bstatic
1345 @itemx -dn
1346 @itemx -non_shared
1347 @itemx -static
1348 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1349 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1350 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1351 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1352 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1353 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1354 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1355 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1356 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1357 libraries.
1358
1359 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1360 @item -Bsymbolic
1361 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1362 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1363 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1364 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1365 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1366 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1367 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1368 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1369
1370 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1371 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1372 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1373 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1374 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1375 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1376 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1378 libraries and position independent executables.
1379
1380 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1381 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1382 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1383 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1384 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1385 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1386 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1387 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1388 which support shared libraries.
1389
1390 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1391 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1392
1393 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1394 @item --dynamic-list-data
1395 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1396
1397 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1398 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1399 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1400 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1401
1402 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1403 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1404 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1405
1406 @kindex --check-sections
1407 @kindex --no-check-sections
1408 @item --check-sections
1409 @itemx --no-check-sections
1410 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1411 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1412 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1413 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1414 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1415 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1416 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1417 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1418 option.
1419
1420 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1421 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1422 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1423 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1424 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1425 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1426 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1427 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1428 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1429 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1430 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1431 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1432
1433 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1434 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1435 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1436 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1437 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1438 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1439 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1440 symbols.
1441
1442 @cindex cross reference table
1443 @kindex --cref
1444 @item --cref
1445 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1446 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1447 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1448
1449 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1450 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1451 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1452 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1453 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1454 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1455 symbol are listed.
1456
1457 @cindex common allocation
1458 @kindex --no-define-common
1459 @item --no-define-common
1460 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1461 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1462 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1463
1464 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1465 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1466 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1467 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1468 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1469 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1470 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1471 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1472 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1473 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1474
1475 @cindex symbols, from command line
1476 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1477 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1478 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1479 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1480 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1481 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1482 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1483 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1484 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1485 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1486 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1487 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1488
1489 @cindex demangling, from command line
1490 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1491 @kindex --no-demangle
1492 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1493 @itemx --no-demangle
1494 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1495 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1496 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1497 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1498 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1499 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1500 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1501 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1502 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1503
1504 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1505 @kindex -I@var{file}
1506 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1507 @item -I@var{file}
1508 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1509 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1510 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1511 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1512 doing.
1513
1514 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1515 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1516 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1517 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1518 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1519 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1520
1521 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1522 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1523 @item --fatal-warnings
1524 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1525 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1526 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1527
1528 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1529 @item --force-exe-suffix
1530 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1531
1532 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1533 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1534 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1535 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1536 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1537 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1538
1539 @kindex --gc-sections
1540 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1541 @cindex garbage collection
1542 @item --gc-sections
1543 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1544 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1545 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1546 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1547 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1548 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1549 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1550
1551 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1552 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1553 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1554 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1555 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1556 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1557 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1558 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1559 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1560
1561 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1562 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1563 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1564 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1565
1566 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1567 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1568 @cindex garbage collection
1569 @item --print-gc-sections
1570 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1571 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1572 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1573 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1574 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1575 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1576 line.
1577
1578 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1579 @cindex garbage collection
1580 @item --gc-keep-exported
1581 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1582 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1583 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1584 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1585 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1586 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1587 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1588 ELF format targets.
1589
1590 @kindex --print-output-format
1591 @cindex output format
1592 @item --print-output-format
1593 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1594 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1595 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1596
1597 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1598 @cindex memory usage
1599 @item --print-memory-usage
1600 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1601 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1602 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1603 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1604 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1605
1606 @smallexample
1607 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1608 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1609 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1610 @end smallexample
1611
1612 @cindex help
1613 @cindex usage
1614 @kindex --help
1615 @item --help
1616 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1617
1618 @kindex --target-help
1619 @item --target-help
1620 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1621
1622 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1623 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1624 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1625 @option{-M} option, above.
1626
1627 @cindex memory usage
1628 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1629 @item --no-keep-memory
1630 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1631 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1632 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1633 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1634 while linking a large executable.
1635
1636 @kindex --no-undefined
1637 @kindex -z defs
1638 @item --no-undefined
1639 @itemx -z defs
1640 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1641 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1642 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1643 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1644 libraries being linked in.
1645
1646 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1647 @kindex -z muldefs
1648 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1649 @itemx -z muldefs
1650 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1651 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1652 first definition will be used.
1653
1654 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1655 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1656 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1657 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1658 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1659 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1660 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1661 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1662 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1663
1664 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1665 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1666 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1667 a shared library.
1668
1669 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1670 libraries specified at link time are that:
1671
1672 @itemize @bullet
1673 @item
1674 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1675 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1676 resolvable at load time.
1677 @item
1678 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1679 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1680
1681 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1682 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1683 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1684 appropriate memset function.
1685 @end itemize
1686
1687 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1688 @item --no-undefined-version
1689 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1690 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1691 will be issued instead.
1692
1693 @kindex --default-symver
1694 @item --default-symver
1695 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1696 exported symbols.
1697
1698 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1699 @item --default-imported-symver
1700 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1701 imported symbols.
1702
1703 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1704 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1705 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1706 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1707 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1708 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1709 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1710 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1711 inappropriate.
1712
1713 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1714 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1715 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1716 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1717
1718 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1719 @item --no-whole-archive
1720 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1721 archive files.
1722
1723 @cindex output file after errors
1724 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1725 @item --noinhibit-exec
1726 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1727 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1728 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1729 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1730
1731 @kindex -nostdlib
1732 @item -nostdlib
1733 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1734 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1735 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1736
1737 @ifclear SingleFormat
1738 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1739 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1740 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1741 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1742 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1743 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1744 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1745 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1746 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1747 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1748 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1749 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1750 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1751 @end ifclear
1752
1753 @kindex --out-implib
1754 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1755 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1756 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1757 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1758 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1759 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1760 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1761 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1762
1763 @kindex -pie
1764 @kindex --pic-executable
1765 @item -pie
1766 @itemx --pic-executable
1767 @cindex position independent executables
1768 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1769 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1770 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1771 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1772 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1773 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1774
1775 @kindex -qmagic
1776 @item -qmagic
1777 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1778
1779 @kindex -Qy
1780 @item -Qy
1781 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1782
1783 @kindex --relax
1784 @cindex synthesizing linker
1785 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1786 @cindex --no-relax
1787 @item --relax
1788 @itemx --no-relax
1789 An option with machine dependent effects.
1790 @ifset GENERIC
1791 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1792 @end ifset
1793 @ifset H8300
1794 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1795 @end ifset
1796 @ifset I960
1797 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1798 @end ifset
1799 @ifset XTENSA
1800 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1801 @end ifset
1802 @ifset M68HC11
1803 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1804 @end ifset
1805 @ifset NIOSII
1806 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1807 @end ifset
1808 @ifset POWERPC
1809 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1810 @end ifset
1811
1812 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1813 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1814 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1815 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1816 instructions, and combining constant values.
1817
1818 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1819 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1820 @ifset GENERIC
1821 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1822 family of processors.
1823 @end ifset
1824
1825 @ifset GENERIC
1826 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1827 but ignored.
1828 @end ifset
1829
1830 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1831 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1832
1833 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1834 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1835 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1836 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1837 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1838 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1839 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1840 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1841 @ifset GENERIC
1842 (such as VxWorks)
1843 @end ifset
1844 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1845 run-time memory.
1846
1847 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1848 or symbols needed for relocations.
1849
1850 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1851 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1852
1853 @ifset GENERIC
1854 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1855 @cindex runtime library search path
1856 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1857 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1858 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1859 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1860 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1861 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1862 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1863 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1864 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1865 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1866
1867 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1868 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1869 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1870 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1871 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1872 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1873 file systems.
1874
1875 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1876 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1877 the @option{-rpath} option.
1878 @end ifset
1879
1880 @ifset GENERIC
1881 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1882 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1883 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1884 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1885 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1886 of the input files.
1887
1888 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1889 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1890 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1891 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1892 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1893 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1894 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1895 appearing multiple times.
1896
1897 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1898 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1899 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1900 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1901 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1902
1903 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1904 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1905 supported.
1906
1907 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1908 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1909 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1910 runtime linker would do.
1911
1912 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1913 libraries:
1914 @enumerate
1915 @item
1916 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1917 @item
1918 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1919 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1920 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1921 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1922 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1923 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1924 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1925 @item
1926 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1927 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1928 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1929 @item
1930 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1931 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1932 @item
1933 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1934 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1935 @item
1936 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1937 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1938 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1939 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1940 @item
1941 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1942 @item
1943 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1944 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1945 @end enumerate
1946
1947 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1948 warning and continue with the link.
1949 @end ifset
1950
1951 @kindex -shared
1952 @kindex -Bshareable
1953 @item -shared
1954 @itemx -Bshareable
1955 @cindex shared libraries
1956 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1957 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1958 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1959 undefined symbols in the link.
1960
1961 @kindex --sort-common
1962 @item --sort-common
1963 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1964 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1965 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1966 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1967 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1968 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1969 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1970 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1971
1972 @kindex --sort-section=name
1973 @item --sort-section=name
1974 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1975 patterns in the linker script.
1976
1977 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1978 @item --sort-section=alignment
1979 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1980 patterns in the linker script.
1981
1982 @kindex --split-by-file
1983 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1984 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1985 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1986 size of 1 if not given.
1987
1988 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1989 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1990 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1991 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1992 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1993 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1994 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1995 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1996 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1997 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1998 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1999 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2000
2001 @kindex --stats
2002 @item --stats
2003 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2004 as execution time and memory usage.
2005
2006 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2007 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2008 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2009 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2010 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2011
2012 @kindex --traditional-format
2013 @cindex traditional format
2014 @item --traditional-format
2015 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2016 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2017 use the traditional format instead.
2018
2019 @cindex dbx
2020 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2021 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2022 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2023 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2024 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2025 combine duplicate entries.
2026
2027 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2028 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2029 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2030 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2031 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2032 line.
2033 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2034 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2035 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2036 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2037 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2038
2039 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2040 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2041 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2042 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2043 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2044 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2045 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2046 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2047 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2048
2049 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2050 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2051 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2052 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2053 byte of the text segment.
2054
2055 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2056 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2057 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2058 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2059 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2060 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2061
2062 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2063 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2064 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2065 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2066 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2067
2068 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2069 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2070 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2071 values for @samp{method}:
2072
2073 @table @samp
2074 @item ignore-all
2075 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2076
2077 @item report-all
2078 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2079
2080 @item ignore-in-object-files
2081 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2082 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2083
2084 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2085 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2086 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2087 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2088 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2089 command line.
2090 @end table
2091
2092 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2093 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2094
2095 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2096 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2097 can change this to a warning.
2098
2099 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2100 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2101 @item --dll-verbose
2102 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2103 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2104 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2105 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2106 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2107
2108 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2109 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2110 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2111 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2112 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2113 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2114 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2115 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2116 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2117 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2118 @xref{WIN32}.
2119
2120 @kindex --warn-common
2121 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2122 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2123 @item --warn-common
2124 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2125 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2126 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2127 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2128 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2129 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2130
2131 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2132
2133 @table @samp
2134 @item int i = 1;
2135 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2136 file.
2137
2138 @item extern int i;
2139 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2140 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2141 variable somewhere.
2142
2143 @item int i;
2144 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2145 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2146 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2147 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2148 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2149 a definition of the same variable.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2153 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2154 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2155 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2156 a common symbol.
2157
2158 @enumerate
2159 @item
2160 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2161 definition for the symbol.
2162 @smallexample
2163 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2164 overridden by definition
2165 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2166 @end smallexample
2167
2168 @item
2169 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2170 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2171 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2172 @smallexample
2173 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2174 overriding common
2175 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2176 @end smallexample
2177
2178 @item
2179 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2180 @smallexample
2181 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2182 of `@var{symbol}'
2183 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2184 @end smallexample
2185
2186 @item
2187 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2188 @smallexample
2189 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2190 overridden by larger common
2191 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2192 @end smallexample
2193
2194 @item
2195 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2196 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2197 encountered in a different order.
2198 @smallexample
2199 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2200 overriding smaller common
2201 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2202 @end smallexample
2203 @end enumerate
2204
2205 @kindex --warn-constructors
2206 @item --warn-constructors
2207 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2208 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2209 detect the use of global constructors.
2210
2211 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2212 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2213 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2214 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2215 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2216 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2217 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2218 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2219 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2220 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2221 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2222 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2223 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2224
2225 @kindex --warn-once
2226 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2227 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2228 @item --warn-once
2229 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2230 which refers to it.
2231
2232 @kindex --warn-section-align
2233 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2234 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2235 @item --warn-section-align
2236 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2237 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2238 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2239 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2240 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2241
2242 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2243 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2244 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2245
2246 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2247 @item --warn-alternate-em
2248 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2249
2250 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2251 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2252 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2253 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2254 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2255
2256 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2257 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2258 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2259 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2260
2261 @kindex --whole-archive
2262 @cindex including an entire archive
2263 @item --whole-archive
2264 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2265 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2266 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2267 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2268 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2269 library. This option may be used more than once.
2270
2271 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2272 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2273 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2274 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2275 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2276
2277 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2278 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2279 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2280 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2281 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2282 @var{symbol}.
2283
2284 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2285 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2286 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2287 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2288
2289 Here is a trivial example:
2290
2291 @smallexample
2292 void *
2293 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2294 @{
2295 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2296 return __real_malloc (c);
2297 @}
2298 @end smallexample
2299
2300 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2301 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2302 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2303 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2304
2305 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2306 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2307 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2308 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2309 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2310
2311 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2312 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2313 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2314 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2315 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2316 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2317 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2318
2319 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2320 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2321 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2322 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2323 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2324
2325 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2326 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2327 @item --enable-new-dtags
2328 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2329 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2330 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2331 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2332 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2333 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2334 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2335 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2336
2337 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2338 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2339 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2340 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2341 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2342 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2343 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2344
2345 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2346 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2347 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2348 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2349 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2350 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2351 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2352
2353 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2354 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2355 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2356 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2357 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2358 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2359 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2360 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2361 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2362 compressed using zlib.
2363
2364 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2365 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2366 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2367 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2368 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2369 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2370
2371 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2372 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2373
2374 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2375 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2376 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2377 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2378
2379 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2380 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2381 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2382 @option{--help} option.
2383
2384 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2385 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2386 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2387 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2388 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2389 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2390
2391 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2392 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2393 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2394 has been used.
2395
2396 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2397 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2398
2399 @kindex --build-id
2400 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2401 @item --build-id
2402 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2403 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2404 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2405 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2406 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2407 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2408 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2409 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2410 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2411 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2412 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2413
2414 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2415 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2416 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2417 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2418 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2419 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2420
2421 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2422 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2423 @end table
2424
2425 @c man end
2426
2427 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2428
2429 @c man begin OPTIONS
2430
2431 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2432 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2433 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2434 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2435 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2436 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2437 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2438 object file).
2439
2440 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2441 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2442 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2443 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2444
2445 @table @gcctabopt
2446
2447 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2448 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2449 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2450 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2451 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2452
2453 @kindex --base-file
2454 @item --base-file @var{file}
2455 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2456 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2457 @file{dlltool}.
2458 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2459
2460 @kindex --dll
2461 @item --dll
2462 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2463 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2464 file.
2465 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2466
2467 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2468 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2469 @item --enable-long-section-names
2470 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2471 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2472 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2473 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2474 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2475 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2476 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2477 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2478 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2479 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2480 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2481 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2482 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2483 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2484 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2485 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2486 image and not stripping symbols.
2487 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2488
2489 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2490 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2491 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2492 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2493 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2494 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2495 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2496 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2497 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2498 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2499 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2500 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2501 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2502 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2503 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2504 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2505 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2506 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2507
2508 @kindex --leading-underscore
2509 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2510 @item --leading-underscore
2511 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2512 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2513 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2514 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2515
2516 @cindex DLLs, creating
2517 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2518 @item --export-all-symbols
2519 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2520 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2521 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2522 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2523 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2524 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2525 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2526 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2527 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2528 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2529 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2530 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2531 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2532 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2533 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2534 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2535 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2536 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2537 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2538 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2539 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2540 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2541 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2542
2543 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2544 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2545 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2546 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2547 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2548
2549 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2550 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2551 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2552 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --file-alignment
2555 @item --file-alignment
2556 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2557 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2558 512.
2559 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2560
2561 @cindex heap size
2562 @kindex --heap
2563 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2564 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2565 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2566 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2567 committed.
2568 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2569
2570 @cindex image base
2571 @kindex --image-base
2572 @item --image-base @var{value}
2573 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2574 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2575 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2576 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2577 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2578 for dlls.
2579 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2580
2581 @kindex --kill-at
2582 @item --kill-at
2583 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2584 symbols before they are exported.
2585 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2586
2587 @kindex --large-address-aware
2588 @item --large-address-aware
2589 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2590 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2591 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2592 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2593 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2594 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2595
2596 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2597 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2598 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2599 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2600 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2601 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2602 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2603
2604 @kindex --major-image-version
2605 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2606 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2608
2609 @kindex --major-os-version
2610 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2611 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2612 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
2614 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2615 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2616 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2617 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2618
2619 @kindex --minor-image-version
2620 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2621 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2622 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2623
2624 @kindex --minor-os-version
2625 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2626 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2627 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2628
2629 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2630 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2631 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2632 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2633
2634 @cindex DEF files, creating
2635 @cindex DLLs, creating
2636 @kindex --output-def
2637 @item --output-def @var{file}
2638 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2639 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2640 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2641 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2642 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2643 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2644
2645 @cindex DLLs, creating
2646 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2647 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2648 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2649 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2650 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2651 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2652 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2653 execution are avoided.
2654 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2657 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2658 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2659 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2660 default.
2661 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2662
2663 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2664 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2665 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2666 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2667 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2668 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2669 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2670 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2671 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2675 @item --enable-auto-import
2676 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2677 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2678 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2679 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2680 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2681 specification published by Microsoft.
2682
2683 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2684 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2685 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2686 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2687 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2688
2689 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2690 see this message:
2691
2692 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2693 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2694
2695 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2696 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2697 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2698 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2699 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2700 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2701 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2702 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2703 the warning, and exit.
2704
2705 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2706 data type of the exported variable:
2707
2708 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2709 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2710 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2711
2712 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2713 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2714 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2715 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2716
2717 @example
2718 extern type extern_array[];
2719 extern_array[1] -->
2720 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2721 @end example
2722
2723 or
2724
2725 @example
2726 extern type extern_array[];
2727 extern_array[1] -->
2728 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2729 @end example
2730
2731 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2732 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2733
2734 @example
2735 extern struct s extern_struct;
2736 extern_struct.field -->
2737 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2738 @end example
2739
2740 or
2741
2742 @example
2743 extern long long extern_ll;
2744 extern_ll -->
2745 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2746 @end example
2747
2748 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2749 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2750 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2751 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2752 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2753 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2754 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2755 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2756
2757 Original:
2758 @example
2759 --foo.h
2760 extern int arr[];
2761 --foo.c
2762 #include "foo.h"
2763 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2764 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2765 @}
2766 @end example
2767
2768 Solution 1:
2769 @example
2770 --foo.h
2771 extern int arr[];
2772 --foo.c
2773 #include "foo.h"
2774 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2775 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2776 volatile int *parr = arr;
2777 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2778 @}
2779 @end example
2780
2781 Solution 2:
2782 @example
2783 --foo.h
2784 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2785 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2786 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2787 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2788 #else
2789 #define FOO_IMPORT
2790 #endif
2791 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2792 --foo.c
2793 #include "foo.h"
2794 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2795 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2796 @}
2797 @end example
2798
2799 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2800 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2801 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2802 functions).
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2806 @item --disable-auto-import
2807 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2808 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2809 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2810
2811 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2812 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2813 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2814 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2815 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2816 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2817 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2818
2819 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2820 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2821 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2822 DLLs.
2823 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2824
2825 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2826 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2827 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2828 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2829
2830 @kindex --section-alignment
2831 @item --section-alignment
2832 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2833 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2834 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2835
2836 @cindex stack size
2837 @kindex --stack
2838 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2839 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2840 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2841 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2842 committed.
2843 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2844
2845 @kindex --subsystem
2846 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2847 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2848 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2849 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2850 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2851 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2852 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2853 @var{which}.
2854 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2855
2856 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2857 of the PE file header:
2858 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2859
2860 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2861 @item --high-entropy-va
2862 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2863 (ASLR).
2864
2865 @kindex --dynamicbase
2866 @item --dynamicbase
2867 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2868 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2869 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2870
2871 @kindex --forceinteg
2872 @item --forceinteg
2873 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2874
2875 @kindex --nxcompat
2876 @item --nxcompat
2877 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2878 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2879
2880 @kindex --no-isolation
2881 @item --no-isolation
2882 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2883
2884 @kindex --no-seh
2885 @item --no-seh
2886 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2887 this image.
2888
2889 @kindex --no-bind
2890 @item --no-bind
2891 Do not bind this image.
2892
2893 @kindex --wdmdriver
2894 @item --wdmdriver
2895 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2896
2897 @kindex --tsaware
2898 @item --tsaware
2899 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2900
2901 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2902 @item --insert-timestamp
2903 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2904 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2905 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2906 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2907 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2908 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2909 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2910 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2911 identically.
2912 @end table
2913
2914 @c man end
2915
2916 @ifset C6X
2917 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2918
2919 @c man begin OPTIONS
2920
2921 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2922 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2923 all executables use an index of 0.
2924
2925 @table @gcctabopt
2926
2927 @kindex --dsbt-size
2928 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2929 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2930 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2931 entries.
2932
2933 @kindex --dsbt-index
2934 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2935 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2936 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2937 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2938 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2939
2940 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2941 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2942 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2943
2944 @end table
2945
2946 @c man end
2947 @end ifset
2948
2949 @ifset M68HC11
2950 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2951
2952 @c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2955 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2956
2957 @table @gcctabopt
2958
2959 @kindex --no-trampoline
2960 @item --no-trampoline
2961 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2962 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2963 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2964
2965 @kindex --bank-window
2966 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2967 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2968 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2969 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2970 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2971
2972 @end table
2973
2974 @c man end
2975 @end ifset
2976
2977 @ifset M68K
2978 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2979
2980 @c man begin OPTIONS
2981
2982 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2983 when linking for 68K targets.
2984
2985 @table @gcctabopt
2986
2987 @kindex --got
2988 @item --got=@var{type}
2989 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2990 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2991 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2992 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2993
2994 @end table
2995
2996 @c man end
2997 @end ifset
2998
2999 @ifset MIPS
3000 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3001
3002 @c man begin OPTIONS
3003
3004 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3005 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3006 linking for MIPS targets.
3007
3008 @table @gcctabopt
3009
3010 @kindex --insn32
3011 @item --insn32
3012 @kindex --no-insn32
3013 @itemx --no-insn32
3014 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3015 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3016 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3017 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3018 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3019 possible.
3020
3021 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3022 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3023 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3024 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3025 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3026 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3027 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3028 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3029 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3030 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3031 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3032 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3033 an error.
3034
3035 @end table
3036
3037 @c man end
3038 @end ifset
3039
3040 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3041 @node Environment
3042 @section Environment Variables
3043
3044 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3045
3046 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3047 @ifclear SingleFormat
3048 @code{GNUTARGET},
3049 @end ifclear
3050 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3051
3052 @ifclear SingleFormat
3053 @kindex GNUTARGET
3054 @cindex default input format
3055 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3056 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3057 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3058 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3059 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3060 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3061 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3062 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3063 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3064 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3065 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3066 @end ifclear
3067
3068 @kindex LDEMULATION
3069 @cindex default emulation
3070 @cindex emulation, default
3071 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3072 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3073 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3074 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3075 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3076 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3077 linker was configured.
3078
3079 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3080 @cindex demangling, default
3081 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3082 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3083 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3084 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3085 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3086 options.
3087
3088 @c man end
3089 @end ifset
3090
3091 @node Scripts
3092 @chapter Linker Scripts
3093
3094 @cindex scripts
3095 @cindex linker scripts
3096 @cindex command files
3097 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3098 written in the linker command language.
3099
3100 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3101 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3102 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3103 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3104 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3105 described below.
3106
3107 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3108 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3109 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3110 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3111 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3112
3113 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3114 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3115 default linker script.
3116
3117 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3118 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3119 Linker Scripts}.
3120
3121 @menu
3122 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3123 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3124 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3125 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3126 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3127 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3128 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3129 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3130 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3131 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3132 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3133 @end menu
3134
3135 @node Basic Script Concepts
3136 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3137 @cindex linker script concepts
3138 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3139 describe the linker script language.
3140
3141 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3142 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3143 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3144 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3145 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3146 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3147 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3148 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3149
3150 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3151 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3152 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3153 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3154 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3155 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3156 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3157 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3158 of debugging information.
3159
3160 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3161 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3162 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3163 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3164 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3165 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3166 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3167 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3168 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3169 RAM address would be the VMA.
3170
3171 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3172 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3173
3174 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3175 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3176 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3177 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3178 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3179 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3180 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3181
3182 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3183 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3184 option.
3185
3186 @node Script Format
3187 @section Linker Script Format
3188 @cindex linker script format
3189 Linker scripts are text files.
3190
3191 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3192 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3193 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3194 generally ignored.
3195
3196 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3197 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3198 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3199 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3200 file name.
3201
3202 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3203 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3204 to whitespace.
3205
3206 @node Simple Example
3207 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3208 @cindex linker script example
3209 @cindex example of linker script
3210 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3211
3212 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3213 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3214 memory layout of the output file.
3215
3216 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3217 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3218 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3219 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3220 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3221 your input files.
3222
3223 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3224 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3225 linker script which will do that:
3226 @smallexample
3227 SECTIONS
3228 @{
3229 . = 0x10000;
3230 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3231 . = 0x8000000;
3232 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3233 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3234 @}
3235 @end smallexample
3236
3237 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3238 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3239 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3240
3241 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3242 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3243 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3244 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3245 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3246 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3247 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3248
3249 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3250 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3251 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3252 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3253 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3254 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3255
3256 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3257 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3258 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3259
3260 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3261 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3262 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3263 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3264 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3265 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3266 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3267
3268 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3269 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3270 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3271 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3272 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3273 sections.
3274
3275 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3276
3277 @node Simple Commands
3278 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3279 @cindex linker script simple commands
3280 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3281
3282 @menu
3283 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3284 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3285 @ifclear SingleFormat
3286 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3287 @end ifclear
3288
3289 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3290 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3291 @end menu
3292
3293 @node Entry Point
3294 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3295 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3296 @cindex start of execution
3297 @cindex first instruction
3298 @cindex entry point
3299 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3300 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3301 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3302 @smallexample
3303 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3304 @end smallexample
3305
3306 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3307 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3308 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3309 @itemize @bullet
3310 @item
3311 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3312 @item
3313 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3314 @item
3315 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3316 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3317 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3318 @item
3319 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3320 @item
3321 The address @code{0}.
3322 @end itemize
3323
3324 @node File Commands
3325 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3326 @cindex linker script file commands
3327 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3328
3329 @table @code
3330 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3331 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3332 @cindex including a linker script
3333 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3334 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3335 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3336 10 levels deep.
3337
3338 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3339 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3340
3341 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3342 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3343 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3344 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3345 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3346 @cindex linker script input object files
3347 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3348 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3349
3350 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3351 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3352 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3353
3354 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3355 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3356
3357 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3358 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3359 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3360 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3361 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3362 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3363 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3364 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3365 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3366
3367 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3368 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3369 @samp{-l}.
3370
3371 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3372 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3373 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3374
3375 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3376 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3377 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3378 @cindex grouping input files
3379 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3380 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3381 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3382 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3383
3384 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3385 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3386 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3387 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3388 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3389 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3390 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3391 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3392 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3393 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3394 setting afterwards.
3395
3396 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3397 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3398 @cindex output file name in linker script
3399 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3400 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3401 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3402 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3403 precedence.
3404
3405 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3406 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3407
3408 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3409 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3410 @cindex library search path in linker script
3411 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3412 @cindex search path in linker script
3413 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3414 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3415 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3416 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3417 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3418 the command line option are searched first.
3419
3420 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3421 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3422 @cindex first input file
3423 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3424 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3425 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3426 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3427 first file.
3428 @end table
3429
3430 @ifclear SingleFormat
3431 @node Format Commands
3432 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3433 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3434
3435 @table @code
3436 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3437 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3438 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3439 @cindex output file format in linker script
3440 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3441 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3442 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3443 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3444 line option takes precedence.
3445
3446 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3447 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3448 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3449 desired endianness.
3450
3451 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3452 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3453 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3454 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3455
3456 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3457 command:
3458 @smallexample
3459 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3460 @end smallexample
3461 This says that the default format for the output file is
3462 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3463 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3464 format.
3465
3466 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3467 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3468 @cindex input file format in linker script
3469 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3470 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3471 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3472 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3473 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3474 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3475 @end table
3476 @end ifclear
3477
3478 @node REGION_ALIAS
3479 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3480 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3481 @cindex region alias
3482 @cindex region names
3483
3484 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3485 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3486
3487 @smallexample
3488 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3489 @end smallexample
3490
3491 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3492 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3493 to memory regions. An example follows.
3494
3495 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3496 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3497 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3498 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3499 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3500 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3501 sections:
3502
3503 @itemize @bullet
3504 @item
3505 @code{.text} program code;
3506 @item
3507 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3508 @item
3509 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3510 @item
3511 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3512 @end itemize
3513
3514 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3515 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3516 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3517 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3518 @code{C}:
3519 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3520 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3521 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3522 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3523 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3524 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3525 @end multitable
3526 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3527 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3528 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3529 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3530
3531 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3532 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3533 memory layout:
3534 @smallexample
3535 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3536
3537 SECTIONS
3538 @{
3539 .text :
3540 @{
3541 *(.text)
3542 @} > REGION_TEXT
3543 .rodata :
3544 @{
3545 *(.rodata)
3546 rodata_end = .;
3547 @} > REGION_RODATA
3548 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3549 @{
3550 data_start = .;
3551 *(.data)
3552 @} > REGION_DATA
3553 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3554 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3555 .bss :
3556 @{
3557 *(.bss)
3558 @} > REGION_BSS
3559 @}
3560 @end smallexample
3561
3562 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3563 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3564 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3565 @table @code
3566 @item A
3567 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3568 @smallexample
3569 MEMORY
3570 @{
3571 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3572 @}
3573
3574 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3575 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3576 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3577 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3578 @end smallexample
3579 @item B
3580 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3581 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3582 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3583 @smallexample
3584 MEMORY
3585 @{
3586 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3587 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3588 @}
3589
3590 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3591 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3592 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3593 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3594 @end smallexample
3595 @item C
3596 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3597 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3598 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3599 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3600 @smallexample
3601 MEMORY
3602 @{
3603 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3604 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3605 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3606 @}
3607
3608 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3609 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3610 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3611 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3612 @end smallexample
3613 @end table
3614
3615 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3616 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3617 necessary:
3618 @smallexample
3619 #include <string.h>
3620
3621 extern char data_start [];
3622 extern char data_size [];
3623 extern char data_load_start [];
3624
3625 void copy_data(void)
3626 @{
3627 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3628 @{
3629 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3630 @}
3631 @}
3632 @end smallexample
3633
3634 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3635 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3636 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3637
3638 @table @code
3639 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3640 @kindex ASSERT
3641 @cindex assertion in linker script
3642 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3643 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3644
3645 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3646 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3647 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3648 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3649 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 .stack :
3653 @{
3654 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3655 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3656 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3657 @}
3658 @end smallexample
3659
3660 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3661 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3662 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3663
3664 @smallexample
3665 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3666 .stack :
3667 @{
3668 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3669 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3670 @}
3671 @end smallexample
3672
3673 will work.
3674
3675 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3676 @kindex EXTERN
3677 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3678 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3679 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3680 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3681 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3682 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3683
3684 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3685 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3686 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3687 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3688 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3689 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3690
3691 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3692 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3693 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3694 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3695 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3696 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3697
3698 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3699 @kindex INSERT
3700 @cindex insert user script into default script
3701 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3702 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3703 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3704 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3705 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3706 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3707 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3708 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3709 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3710 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3711 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3712 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3713 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3714
3715 @smallexample
3716 SECTIONS
3717 @{
3718 OVERLAY :
3719 @{
3720 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3721 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3722 @}
3723 @}
3724 INSERT AFTER .text;
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3728 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3729 @cindex cross references
3730 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3731 references among certain output sections.
3732
3733 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3734 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3735 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3736 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3737 a function defined in the other section.
3738
3739 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3740 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3741 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3742 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3743 names.
3744
3745 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3746 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3747 @cindex cross references
3748 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3749 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3750
3751 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3752 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3753 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3754 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3755 must never call back.
3756
3757 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3758 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3759 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3760 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3761 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3762 names, not input section names.
3763
3764 @ifclear SingleFormat
3765 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3766 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3767 @cindex machine architecture
3768 @cindex architecture
3769 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3770 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3771 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3772 the @samp{-f} option.
3773 @end ifclear
3774
3775 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3776 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3777 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3778 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3779 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3780 @xref{Expression Section}.
3781 @end table
3782
3783 @node Assignments
3784 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3785 @cindex assignment in scripts
3786 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3787 @cindex variables, defining
3788 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3789 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3790
3791 @menu
3792 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3793 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3794 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3795 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3796 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3797 @end menu
3798
3799 @node Simple Assignments
3800 @subsection Simple Assignments
3801
3802 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3803
3804 @table @code
3805 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3806 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3807 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3808 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3809 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3810 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3811 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3812 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3813 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3814 @end table
3815
3816 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3817 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3818 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3819
3820 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3821 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3822
3823 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3824
3825 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3826
3827 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3828 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3829 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3830
3831 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3832 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3833
3834 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3835 assignments may be used:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 floating_point = 0;
3839 SECTIONS
3840 @{
3841 .text :
3842 @{
3843 *(.text)
3844 _etext = .;
3845 @}
3846 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3847 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3848 @}
3849 @end smallexample
3850 @noindent
3851 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3852 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3853 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3854 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3855 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3856
3857 @node HIDDEN
3858 @subsection HIDDEN
3859 @cindex HIDDEN
3860 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3861 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3862
3863 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3864 @code{HIDDEN}:
3865
3866 @smallexample
3867 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3868 SECTIONS
3869 @{
3870 .text :
3871 @{
3872 *(.text)
3873 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3874 @}
3875 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3876 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3877 @}
3878 @end smallexample
3879 @noindent
3880 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3881
3882 @node PROVIDE
3883 @subsection PROVIDE
3884 @cindex PROVIDE
3885 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3886 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3887 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3888 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3889 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3890 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3891 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3892 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3893
3894 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3895 @smallexample
3896 SECTIONS
3897 @{
3898 .text :
3899 @{
3900 *(.text)
3901 _etext = .;
3902 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3903 @}
3904 @}
3905 @end smallexample
3906
3907 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3908 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3909 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3910 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3911 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3912 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3913
3914 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3915 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3916 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3917 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3918 hidden and won't be exported.
3919
3920 @node Source Code Reference
3921 @subsection Source Code Reference
3922
3923 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3924 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3925 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3926 symbol that does not have a value.
3927
3928 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3929 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3930 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3931 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3932 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3933 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3934 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3935 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 extern int foo;
3939 @end smallexample
3940
3941 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3942
3943 @smallexample
3944 _foo = 1000;
3945 @end smallexample
3946
3947 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3948 transformation has taken place.
3949
3950 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3951 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3952 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3953 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3954 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3955 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3956 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3957
3958 @smallexample
3959 int foo = 1000;
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3963 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3964 number 1000 is initially stored.
3965
3966 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3967 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3968 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3969 So:
3970
3971 @smallexample
3972 foo = 1;
3973 @end smallexample
3974
3975 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3976 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3977 address. Whereas:
3978
3979 @smallexample
3980 int * a = & foo;
3981 @end smallexample
3982
3983 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3984 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3985 the variable @samp{a}.
3986
3987 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3988 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3989 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3990
3991 @smallexample
3992 foo = 1000;
3993 @end smallexample
3994
3995 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3996 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3997 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3998 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3999 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4000
4001 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4002 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4003 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4004 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4005 linker script contains these declarations:
4006
4007 @smallexample
4008 @group
4009 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4010 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4011 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4012 @end group
4013 @end smallexample
4014
4015 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4016
4017 @smallexample
4018 @group
4019 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4020
4021 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4022 @end group
4023 @end smallexample
4024
4025 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4026 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4027 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4028
4029 @smallexample
4030 @group
4031 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4032
4033 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4034 @end group
4035 @end smallexample
4036
4037 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4038 operators.
4039
4040 @node SECTIONS
4041 @section SECTIONS Command
4042 @kindex SECTIONS
4043 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4044 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4045
4046 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4047 @smallexample
4048 SECTIONS
4049 @{
4050 @var{sections-command}
4051 @var{sections-command}
4052 @dots{}
4053 @}
4054 @end smallexample
4055
4056 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4057
4058 @itemize @bullet
4059 @item
4060 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4061 @item
4062 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063 @item
4064 an output section description
4065 @item
4066 an overlay description
4067 @end itemize
4068
4069 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4070 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4071 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4072 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4073 the layout of the output file.
4074
4075 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4076 below.
4077
4078 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4079 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4080 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4081 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4082 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4083 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4084
4085 @menu
4086 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4087 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4088 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4089 * Input Section:: Input section description
4090 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4091 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4092 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4093 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4094 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4095 @end menu
4096
4097 @node Output Section Description
4098 @subsection Output Section Description
4099 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4100 @smallexample
4101 @group
4102 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4103 [AT(@var{lma})]
4104 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4105 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4106 [@var{constraint}]
4107 @{
4108 @var{output-section-command}
4109 @var{output-section-command}
4110 @dots{}
4111 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4112 @end group
4113 @end smallexample
4114
4115 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4116
4117 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4118 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4119 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4120 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4121 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4122
4123 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4124
4125 @itemize @bullet
4126 @item
4127 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4128 @item
4129 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4130 @item
4131 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4132 @item
4133 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4134 @end itemize
4135
4136 @node Output Section Name
4137 @subsection Output Section Name
4138 @cindex name, section
4139 @cindex section name
4140 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4141 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4142 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4143 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4144 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4145 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4146 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4147 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4148 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4149 commas must be quoted.
4150
4151 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4152 Discarding}.
4153
4154 @node Output Section Address
4155 @subsection Output Section Address
4156 @cindex address, section
4157 @cindex section address
4158 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4159 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4160 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4161
4162 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4163 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4164 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4165 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4166 contained within the output section.
4167
4168 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4169
4170 @itemize @bullet
4171 @item
4172 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4173 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4174 in that region.
4175
4176 @item
4177 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4178 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4179 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4180 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4181
4182 @item
4183 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4184 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4185 counter.
4186 @end itemize
4187
4188 @noindent
4189 For example:
4190
4191 @smallexample
4192 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4193 @end smallexample
4194
4195 @noindent
4196 and
4197
4198 @smallexample
4199 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4200 @end smallexample
4201
4202 @noindent
4203 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4204 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4205 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4206 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4207 input sections.
4208
4209 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4210 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4211 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4212 do something like this:
4213 @smallexample
4214 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4215 @end smallexample
4216 @noindent
4217 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4218 aligned upward to the specified value.
4219
4220 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4221 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4222 sections are ignored).
4223
4224 @node Input Section
4225 @subsection Input Section Description
4226 @cindex input sections
4227 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4228 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4229
4230 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4231 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4232 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4233 map the input files into your memory layout.
4234
4235 @menu
4236 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4237 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4238 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4239 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4240 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4241 @end menu
4242
4243 @node Input Section Basics
4244 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4245 @cindex input section basics
4246 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4247 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4248
4249 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4250 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4251
4252 The most common input section description is to include all input
4253 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4254 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4255 @smallexample
4256 *(.text)
4257 @end smallexample
4258 @noindent
4259 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4260 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4261 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4262 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4263 example:
4264 @smallexample
4265 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4266 @end smallexample
4267 @noindent
4268 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4269 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4270 placed inside the section list, for example:
4271 @smallexample
4272 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4273 @end smallexample
4274 @noindent
4275 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4276 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4277 more than one section, as described below.
4278
4279 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4280 @smallexample
4281 *(.text .rdata)
4282 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4283 @end smallexample
4284 @noindent
4285 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4286 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4287 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4288 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4289 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4290 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4291
4292 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4293 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4294 immediately following section, for example:
4295 @smallexample
4296 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4297 @end smallexample
4298 @noindent
4299 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4300 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4301 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4302 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4303 could be modified to:
4304 @smallexample
4305 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4306 @end smallexample
4307 @noindent
4308 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4309 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4310 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4311 @smallexample
4312 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4313 @end smallexample
4314
4315 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4316 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4317 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4318 @smallexample
4319 data.o(.data)
4320 @end smallexample
4321
4322 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4323 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4324
4325 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4326
4327 @smallexample
4328 @group
4329 SECTIONS @{
4330 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4331 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4332 @}
4333 @end group
4334 @end smallexample
4335
4336 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4337 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4338 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4339 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4340 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4341
4342 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4343 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4344 with no whitespace around the colon.
4345
4346 @table @samp
4347 @item archive:file
4348 matches file within archive
4349 @item archive:
4350 matches the whole archive
4351 @item :file
4352 matches file but not one in an archive
4353 @end table
4354
4355 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4356 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4357 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4358 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4359 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4360 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4361 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4362 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4363 command.
4364
4365 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4366 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4367 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4368 @smallexample
4369 data.o
4370 @end smallexample
4371
4372 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4373 and does not contain any wild card
4374 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4375 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4376 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4377 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4378 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4379 the archive search path.
4380
4381 @node Input Section Wildcards
4382 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4383 @cindex input section wildcards
4384 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4385 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4386 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4387 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4388 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4389
4390 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4391 pattern for the file name.
4392
4393 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4394
4395 @table @samp
4396 @item *
4397 matches any number of characters
4398 @item ?
4399 matches any single character
4400 @item [@var{chars}]
4401 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4402 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4403 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4404 @item \
4405 quotes the following character
4406 @end table
4407
4408 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4409 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4410 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4411 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4412 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4413 a @samp{/} character.
4414
4415 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4416 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4417 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4418
4419 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4420 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4421 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4422 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4423 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4424 @smallexample
4425 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4426 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4427 @end smallexample
4428
4429 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4430 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4431 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4432 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4433 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4434 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4435 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4436
4437 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4438 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4439 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4440 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4441 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4442 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4443
4444 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4445 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4446 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4447 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4448 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4449
4450 @cindex SORT
4451 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4452
4453 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4454 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4455
4456 @enumerate
4457 @item
4458 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4459 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4460 sections have the same name.
4461 @item
4462 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4463 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4464 sections have the same alignment.
4465 @item
4466 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4467 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4468 @item
4469 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4470 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4471 @item
4472 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4473 @end enumerate
4474
4475 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4476 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4477 takes precedence over the command line option.
4478
4479 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4480 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4481 treated as nested sorting command.
4482
4483 @enumerate
4484 @item
4485 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4486 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4487 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4488 @item
4489 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4490 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4491 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4492 @end enumerate
4493
4494 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4495 command line option will be ignored.
4496
4497 @cindex SORT_NONE
4498 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4499 section sorting option.
4500
4501 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4502 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4503 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4504
4505 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4506 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4507 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4508 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4509 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4510 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4511 @smallexample
4512 @group
4513 SECTIONS @{
4514 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4515 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4516 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4517 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4518 @}
4519 @end group
4520 @end smallexample
4521
4522 @node Input Section Common
4523 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4524 @cindex common symbol placement
4525 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4526 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4527 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4528 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4529 named @samp{COMMON}.
4530
4531 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4532 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4533 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4534 input files are placed in another section.
4535
4536 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4537 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4538 @smallexample
4539 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4540 @end smallexample
4541
4542 @cindex scommon section
4543 @cindex small common symbols
4544 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4545 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4546 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4547 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4548 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4549 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4550 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4551 locations.
4552
4553 @cindex [COMMON]
4554 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4555 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4556 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4557
4558 @node Input Section Keep
4559 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4560 @cindex KEEP
4561 @cindex garbage collection
4562 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4563 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4564 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4565 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4566 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4567
4568 @node Input Section Example
4569 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4570 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4571 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4572 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4573 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4574 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4575 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4576 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4577 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4578 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4579
4580 @smallexample
4581 @group
4582 SECTIONS @{
4583 outputa 0x10000 :
4584 @{
4585 all.o
4586 foo.o (.input1)
4587 @}
4588 @end group
4589 @group
4590 outputb :
4591 @{
4592 foo.o (.input2)
4593 foo1.o (.input1)
4594 @}
4595 @end group
4596 @group
4597 outputc :
4598 @{
4599 *(.input1)
4600 *(.input2)
4601 @}
4602 @}
4603 @end group
4604 @end smallexample
4605
4606 @node Output Section Data
4607 @subsection Output Section Data
4608 @cindex data
4609 @cindex section data
4610 @cindex output section data
4611 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4612 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4613 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4614 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4615 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4616 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4617 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4618 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4619 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4620 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4621 counter.
4622
4623 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4624 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4625 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4626 stored.
4627
4628 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4629 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4630 @smallexample
4631 BYTE(1)
4632 LONG(addr)
4633 @end smallexample
4634
4635 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4636 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4637 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4638 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4639 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4640
4641 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4642 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4643 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4644 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4645 endianness of the first input object file.
4646
4647 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4648 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4649 @smallexample
4650 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4651 @end smallexample
4652 whereas this will work:
4653 @smallexample
4654 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4655 @end smallexample
4656
4657 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4658 @cindex holes, filling
4659 @cindex unspecified memory
4660 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4661 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4662 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4663 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4664 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4665 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4666 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4667 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4668 different parts of an output section.
4669
4670 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4671 value @samp{0x90}:
4672 @smallexample
4673 FILL(0x90909090)
4674 @end smallexample
4675
4676 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4677 section attribute, but it only affects the
4678 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4679 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4680 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4681 expression.
4682
4683 @node Output Section Keywords
4684 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4685 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4686 commands.
4687
4688 @table @code
4689 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4690 @cindex input filename symbols
4691 @cindex filename symbols
4692 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4693 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4694 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4695 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4696 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4697
4698 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4699 normally used for any other object file format.
4700
4701 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4702 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4703 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4704 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4705 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4706 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4707 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4708 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4709 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4710 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4711 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4712 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4713 ignored for other object file formats.
4714
4715 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4716 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4717 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4718 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4719 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4720 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4721 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4722 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4723 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4724 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4725 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4726 @code{exit}.
4727
4728 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4729 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4730 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4731 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4732 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4733 runtime code expects to see.
4734
4735 @smallexample
4736 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4737 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4738 *(.ctors)
4739 LONG(0)
4740 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4741 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4742 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4743 *(.dtors)
4744 LONG(0)
4745 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4746 @end smallexample
4747
4748 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4749 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4750 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4751 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4752 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4753 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4754 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4755 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4756
4757 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4758 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4759 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4760 scripts.
4761
4762 @end table
4763
4764 @node Output Section Discarding
4765 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4766 @cindex discarding sections
4767 @cindex sections, discarding
4768 @cindex removing sections
4769 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4770 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4771 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4772 @smallexample
4773 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4774 @end smallexample
4775 @noindent
4776 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4777 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4778 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4779 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4780 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4781 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4782 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4783 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4784 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4785
4786 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4787 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4788 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4789 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4790 section is discarded.
4791
4792 @cindex /DISCARD/
4793 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4794 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4795 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4796
4797 @node Output Section Attributes
4798 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4799 @cindex output section attributes
4800 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4801 like this:
4802
4803 @smallexample
4804 @group
4805 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4806 [AT(@var{lma})]
4807 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4808 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4809 [@var{constraint}]
4810 @{
4811 @var{output-section-command}
4812 @var{output-section-command}
4813 @dots{}
4814 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4815 @end group
4816 @end smallexample
4817
4818 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4819 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4820 remaining section attributes.
4821
4822 @menu
4823 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4824 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4825 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4826 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4827 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4828 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4829 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4830 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4831 @end menu
4832
4833 @node Output Section Type
4834 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4835 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4836 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4837
4838 @table @code
4839 @item NOLOAD
4840 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4841 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4842 @item DSECT
4843 @itemx COPY
4844 @itemx INFO
4845 @itemx OVERLAY
4846 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4847 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4848 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4849 section when the program is run.
4850 @end table
4851
4852 @kindex NOLOAD
4853 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4854 @cindex loading, preventing
4855 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4856 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4857 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4858 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4859 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4860 @smallexample
4861 @group
4862 SECTIONS @{
4863 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4864 @dots{}
4865 @}
4866 @end group
4867 @end smallexample
4868
4869 @node Output Section LMA
4870 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4871 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4872 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4873 @cindex load address
4874 @cindex section load address
4875 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4876 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4877 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4878 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4879 address is optional.
4880
4881 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4882 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4883 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4884 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4885 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4886
4887 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4888 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4889 load address:
4890
4891 @itemize @bullet
4892 @item
4893 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4894 the LMA address as well.
4895
4896 @item
4897 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4898
4899 @item
4900 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4901 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4902 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4903 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4904 the last section in the located region.
4905
4906 @item
4907 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4908 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4909
4910 @item
4911 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4912 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4913 @end itemize
4914
4915 @cindex ROM initialized data
4916 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4917 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4918 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4919 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4920 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4921 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4922 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4923 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4924 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4925
4926 @smallexample
4927 @group
4928 SECTIONS
4929 @{
4930 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4931 .mdata 0x2000 :
4932 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4933 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4934 .bss 0x3000 :
4935 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4936 @}
4937 @end group
4938 @end smallexample
4939
4940 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4941 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4942 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4943 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4944 script.
4945
4946 @smallexample
4947 @group
4948 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4949 char *src = &_etext;
4950 char *dst = &_data;
4951
4952 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4953 while (dst < &_edata)
4954 *dst++ = *src++;
4955
4956 /* Zero bss. */
4957 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4958 *dst = 0;
4959 @end group
4960 @end smallexample
4961
4962 @node Forced Output Alignment
4963 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4964 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4965 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4966 @cindex output section alignment
4967 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4968 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4969 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4970
4971 @node Forced Input Alignment
4972 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4973 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4974 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4975 @cindex input section alignment
4976 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4977 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4978 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4979
4980 @node Output Section Constraint
4981 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4982 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4983 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4984 @cindex constraints on output sections
4985 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4986 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4987 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4988 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4989
4990 @node Output Section Region
4991 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4992 @kindex >@var{region}
4993 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4994 @cindex memory regions and sections
4995 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4996 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4997
4998 Here is a simple example:
4999 @smallexample
5000 @group
5001 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5002 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5003 @end group
5004 @end smallexample
5005
5006 @node Output Section Phdr
5007 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5008 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5009 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5010 @cindex program headers and sections
5011 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5012 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5013 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5014 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5015 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5016 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5017
5018 Here is a simple example:
5019 @smallexample
5020 @group
5021 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5022 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5023 @end group
5024 @end smallexample
5025
5026 @node Output Section Fill
5027 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5028 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5029 @cindex section fill pattern
5030 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5031 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5032 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5033 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5034 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5035 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5036 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5037 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5038 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5039 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5040 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5041 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5042 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5043
5044 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5045 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5046
5047 Here is a simple example:
5048 @smallexample
5049 @group
5050 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5051 @end group
5052 @end smallexample
5053
5054 @node Overlay Description
5055 @subsection Overlay Description
5056 @kindex OVERLAY
5057 @cindex overlays
5058 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5059 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5060 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5061 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5062 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5063 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5064 than another.
5065
5066 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5067 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5068 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5069 command is as follows:
5070 @smallexample
5071 @group
5072 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5073 @{
5074 @var{secname1}
5075 @{
5076 @var{output-section-command}
5077 @var{output-section-command}
5078 @dots{}
5079 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5080 @var{secname2}
5081 @{
5082 @var{output-section-command}
5083 @var{output-section-command}
5084 @dots{}
5085 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5086 @dots{}
5087 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5088 @end group
5089 @end smallexample
5090
5091 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5092 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5093 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5094 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5095 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5096 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5097
5098 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5099 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5100
5101 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5102 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5103 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5104 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5105 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5106 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5107
5108 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5109 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5110 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5111 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5112 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5113
5114 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5115 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5116 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5117 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5118 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5119 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5120 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5121
5122 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5123 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5124
5125 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5126 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5127 @smallexample
5128 @group
5129 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5130 @{
5131 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5132 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5133 @}
5134 @end group
5135 @end smallexample
5136 @noindent
5137 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5138 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5139 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5140 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5141 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5142 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5143
5144 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5145 like the following.
5146
5147 @smallexample
5148 @group
5149 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5150 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5151 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5152 @end group
5153 @end smallexample
5154
5155 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5156 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5157 example could have been written identically as follows.
5158
5159 @smallexample
5160 @group
5161 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5162 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5163 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5164 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5165 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5166 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5167 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5168 @end group
5169 @end smallexample
5170
5171 @node MEMORY
5172 @section MEMORY Command
5173 @kindex MEMORY
5174 @cindex memory regions
5175 @cindex regions of memory
5176 @cindex allocating memory
5177 @cindex discontinuous memory
5178 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5179 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5180
5181 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5182 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5183 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5184 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5185 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5186 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5187 around to fit into the available regions.
5188
5189 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5190 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5191 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5192 @code{MEMORY} is:
5193 @smallexample
5194 @group
5195 MEMORY
5196 @{
5197 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5198 @dots{}
5199 @}
5200 @end group
5201 @end smallexample
5202
5203 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5204 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5205 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5206 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5207 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5208 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5209 command.
5210
5211 @cindex memory region attributes
5212 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5213 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5214 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5215 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5216 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5217 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5218 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5219
5220 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5221 @table @samp
5222 @item R
5223 Read-only section
5224 @item W
5225 Read/write section
5226 @item X
5227 Executable section
5228 @item A
5229 Allocatable section
5230 @item I
5231 Initialized section
5232 @item L
5233 Same as @samp{I}
5234 @item !
5235 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5236 @end table
5237
5238 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5239 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5240 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5241 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5242 attributes.
5243
5244 @kindex ORIGIN =
5245 @kindex o =
5246 @kindex org =
5247 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5248 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5249 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5250 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5251 @code{ORG}).
5252
5253 @kindex LENGTH =
5254 @kindex len =
5255 @kindex l =
5256 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5257 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5258 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5259 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5260
5261 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5262 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5263 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5264 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5265 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5266 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5267 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5268 region.
5269
5270 @smallexample
5271 @group
5272 MEMORY
5273 @{
5274 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5275 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5276 @}
5277 @end group
5278 @end smallexample
5279
5280 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5281 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5282 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5283 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5284 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5285 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5286 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5287 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5288 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5289
5290 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5291 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5292 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5293
5294 @smallexample
5295 @group
5296 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5297 @end group
5298 @end smallexample
5299
5300 @node PHDRS
5301 @section PHDRS Command
5302 @kindex PHDRS
5303 @cindex program headers
5304 @cindex ELF program headers
5305 @cindex program segments
5306 @cindex segments, ELF
5307 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5308 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5309 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5310 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5311
5312 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5313 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5314 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5315 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5316 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5317
5318 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5319 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5320 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5321 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5322 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5323
5324 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5325 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5326 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5327
5328 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5329 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5330
5331 @smallexample
5332 @group
5333 PHDRS
5334 @{
5335 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5336 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5337 @}
5338 @end group
5339 @end smallexample
5340
5341 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5342 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5343 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5344 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5345 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5346 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5347
5348 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5349 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5350 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5351 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5352 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5353 Section Phdr}.
5354
5355 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5356 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5357 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5358 contain the section.
5359
5360 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5361 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5362 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5363 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5364 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5365 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5366 segment at all.
5367
5368 @kindex FILEHDR
5369 @kindex PHDRS
5370 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5371 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5372 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5373 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5374 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5375 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5376 these keywords.
5377
5378 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5379 value of the keyword.
5380
5381 @table @asis
5382 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5383 Indicates an unused program header.
5384
5385 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5386 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5387 the file.
5388
5389 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5390 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5391
5392 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5393 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5394 found.
5395
5396 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5397 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5398
5399 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5400 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5401 ABI.
5402
5403 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5404 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5405
5406 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5407 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5408
5409 @item @var{expression}
5410 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5411 be used for types not defined above.
5412 @end table
5413
5414 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5415 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5416 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5417 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5418 output section attribute.
5419
5420 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5421 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5422 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5423 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5424 header.
5425
5426 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5427 headers used on a native ELF system.
5428
5429 @example
5430 @group
5431 PHDRS
5432 @{
5433 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5434 interp PT_INTERP ;
5435 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5436 data PT_LOAD ;
5437 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5438 @}
5439
5440 SECTIONS
5441 @{
5442 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5443 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5444 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5445 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5446 @dots{}
5447 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5448 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5449 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5450 @dots{}
5451 @}
5452 @end group
5453 @end example
5454
5455 @node VERSION
5456 @section VERSION Command
5457 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5458 @cindex symbol versions
5459 @cindex version script
5460 @cindex versions of symbols
5461 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5462 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5463 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5464 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5465 shared library.
5466
5467 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5468 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5469 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5470
5471 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5472 @smallexample
5473 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5474 @end smallexample
5475
5476 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5477 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5478 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5479 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5480 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5481 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5482 library.
5483
5484 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5485 examples.
5486
5487 @smallexample
5488 VERS_1.1 @{
5489 global:
5490 foo1;
5491 local:
5492 old*;
5493 original*;
5494 new*;
5495 @};
5496
5497 VERS_1.2 @{
5498 foo2;
5499 @} VERS_1.1;
5500
5501 VERS_2.0 @{
5502 bar1; bar2;
5503 extern "C++" @{
5504 ns::*;
5505 "f(int, double)";
5506 @};
5507 @} VERS_1.2;
5508 @end smallexample
5509
5510 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5511 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5512 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5513 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5514 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5515 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5516 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5517 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5518 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5519 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5520
5521 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5522 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5523 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5524
5525 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5526 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5527 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5528
5529 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5530 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5531 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5532 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5533 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5534 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5535 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5536 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5537 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5538
5539 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5540 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5541 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5542 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5543
5544 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5545 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5546 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5547 won't.
5548
5549 @smallexample
5550 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5551 @end smallexample
5552
5553 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5554 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5555 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5556 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5557 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5558 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5559 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5560 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5561 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5562 search for each symbol reference.
5563
5564 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5565 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5566 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5567 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5568 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5569 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5570 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5571 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5572 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5573
5574 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5575 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5576 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5577 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5578 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5579 @smallexample
5580 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5581 @end smallexample
5582 @noindent
5583 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5584 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5585 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5586 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5587 takes precedence over a version script.
5588
5589 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5590 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5591 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5592 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5593 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5594
5595 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5596 source file. Here is an example:
5597
5598 @smallexample
5599 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5600 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5601 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5602 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5603 @end smallexample
5604
5605 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5606 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5607 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5608 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5609
5610 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5611 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5612 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5613 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5614 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5615 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5616
5617 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5618 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5619 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5620 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5621
5622 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5623
5624 @smallexample
5625 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5626 @end smallexample
5627
5628 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5629 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5630 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5631 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5632 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5633
5634 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5635 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5636 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5637 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5638 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5639 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5640 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5641 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5642 expect when you upgrade.
5643
5644 @node Expressions
5645 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5646 @cindex expressions
5647 @cindex arithmetic
5648 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5649 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5650 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5651 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5652
5653 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5654
5655 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5656 expressions.
5657
5658 @menu
5659 * Constants:: Constants
5660 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5661 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5662 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5663 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5664 * Operators:: Operators
5665 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5666 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5667 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5668 @end menu
5669
5670 @node Constants
5671 @subsection Constants
5672 @cindex integer notation
5673 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5674 All constants are integers.
5675
5676 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5677 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5678 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5679 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5680 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5681 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5682
5683 @cindex scaled integers
5684 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5685 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5686 @cindex suffixes for integers
5687 @cindex integer suffixes
5688 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5689 constant by
5690 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5691 @ifnottex
5692 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5693 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5694 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5695 @end ifnottex
5696 @tex
5697 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5698 @end tex
5699 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5700 respectively. For example, the following
5701 all refer to the same quantity:
5702
5703 @smallexample
5704 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5705 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5706 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5707 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5708 @end smallexample
5709
5710 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5711 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5712
5713 @node Symbolic Constants
5714 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5715 @cindex symbolic constants
5716 @kindex CONSTANT
5717 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5718 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5719
5720 @table @code
5721 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5722 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5723 The target's maximum page size.
5724
5725 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5726 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5727 The target's default page size.
5728 @end table
5729
5730 So for example:
5731
5732 @smallexample
5733 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5734 @end smallexample
5735
5736 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5737 supported by the target.
5738
5739 @node Symbols
5740 @subsection Symbol Names
5741 @cindex symbol names
5742 @cindex names
5743 @cindex quoted symbol names
5744 @kindex "
5745 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5746 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5747 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5748 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5749 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5750 @smallexample
5751 "SECTION" = 9;
5752 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5753 @end smallexample
5754
5755 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5756 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5757 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5758
5759 @node Orphan Sections
5760 @subsection Orphan Sections
5761 @cindex orphan
5762 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5763 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5764 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5765 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5766 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5767
5768 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5769 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5770 placed at the end of that output section.
5771
5772 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5773 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5774 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5775 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5776 one new output section.
5777
5778 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5779 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5780 in relation to existing output sections. The linker uses a simple
5781 heuristic to do this. It attempts to place orphan sections after
5782 sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs
5783 non-loadable, etc. If no sections with matching attributes are found,
5784 the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5785
5786 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5787 well as section flag.
5788
5789 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5790 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5791 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5792
5793 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5794 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5795 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5796 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5797 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5798 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5799 character.
5800
5801 @node Location Counter
5802 @subsection The Location Counter
5803 @kindex .
5804 @cindex dot
5805 @cindex location counter
5806 @cindex current output location
5807 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5808 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5809 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5810 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5811 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5812
5813 @cindex holes
5814 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5815 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5816 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5817 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5818 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5819
5820 @smallexample
5821 SECTIONS
5822 @{
5823 output :
5824 @{
5825 file1(.text)
5826 . = . + 1000;
5827 file2(.text)
5828 . += 1000;
5829 file3(.text)
5830 @} = 0x12345678;
5831 @}
5832 @end smallexample
5833 @noindent
5834 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5835 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5836 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5837 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5838 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5839 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5840
5841 @cindex dot inside sections
5842 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5843 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5844 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5845 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5846 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5847 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5848
5849 @smallexample
5850 SECTIONS
5851 @{
5852 . = 0x100
5853 .text: @{
5854 *(.text)
5855 . = 0x200
5856 @}
5857 . = 0x500
5858 .data: @{
5859 *(.data)
5860 . += 0x600
5861 @}
5862 @}
5863 @end smallexample
5864
5865 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5866 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5867 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5868 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5869 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5870 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5871 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5872 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5873
5874 @cindex dot outside sections
5875 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5876 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5877 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5878
5879 @smallexample
5880 SECTIONS
5881 @{
5882 start_of_text = . ;
5883 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5884 end_of_text = . ;
5885
5886 start_of_data = . ;
5887 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5888 end_of_data = . ;
5889 @}
5890 @end smallexample
5891
5892 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5893 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5894 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5895 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5896 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5897 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5898 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5899 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5900 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5901 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5902 as follows:
5903
5904 @smallexample
5905 SECTIONS
5906 @{
5907 start_of_text = . ;
5908 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5909 end_of_text = . ;
5910
5911 start_of_data = . ;
5912 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5913 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5914 end_of_data = . ;
5915 @}
5916 @end smallexample
5917
5918 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5919 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5920 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5921 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5922 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5923 section. So you could write:
5924
5925 @smallexample
5926 SECTIONS
5927 @{
5928 start_of_text = . ;
5929 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5930 end_of_text = . ;
5931
5932 . = . ;
5933 start_of_data = . ;
5934 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5935 end_of_data = . ;
5936 @}
5937 @end smallexample
5938
5939 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5940 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5941
5942 @need 2000
5943 @node Operators
5944 @subsection Operators
5945 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5946 @cindex arithmetic operators
5947 @cindex precedence in expressions
5948 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5949 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5950 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5951 @ifnottex
5952 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5953 @smallexample
5954 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5955 (highest)
5956 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5957 2 left * / %
5958 3 left + -
5959 4 left >> <<
5960 5 left == != > < <= >=
5961 6 left &
5962 7 left |
5963 8 left &&
5964 9 left ||
5965 10 right ? :
5966 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5967 (lowest)
5968 @end smallexample
5969 Notes:
5970 (1) Prefix operators
5971 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5972 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5973 @end ifnottex
5974 @tex
5975 \vskip \baselineskip
5976 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5977 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5978 \hrule
5979 \halign
5980 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5981 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5982 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5983 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5984 \noalign{\hrule}
5985 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5986 &highest&&&&&\cr
5987 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5988 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5989 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5990 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5991 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5992 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5993 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5994 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5995 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5996 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5997 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5998 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5999 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6000 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6001 \hrule}
6002 @end tex
6003 @iftex
6004 {
6005 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6006 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6007 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6008 }
6009 @end iftex
6010 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6011
6012 @node Evaluation
6013 @subsection Evaluation
6014 @cindex lazy evaluation
6015 @cindex expression evaluation order
6016 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6017 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6018
6019 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6020 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6021 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6022 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6023
6024 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6025 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6026 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6027 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6028
6029 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6030 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6031 allocation.
6032
6033 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6034 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6035
6036 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6037 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6038 following
6039 @smallexample
6040 @group
6041 SECTIONS
6042 @{
6043 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6044 @{ *(.text) @}
6045 @}
6046 @end group
6047 @end smallexample
6048 @noindent
6049 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6050 address}.
6051
6052 @node Expression Section
6053 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6054 @cindex expression sections
6055 @cindex absolute expressions
6056 @cindex relative expressions
6057 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6058 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6059 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6060 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6061 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6062 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6063 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6064 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6065 operations.
6066
6067 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6068 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6069 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6070 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6071 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6072 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6073 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6074 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6075 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6076 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6077 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6078 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6079 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6080 everywhere.
6081
6082 In the following simple example,
6083
6084 @smallexample
6085 @group
6086 SECTIONS
6087 @{
6088 . = 0x100;
6089 __executable_start = 0x100;
6090 .data :
6091 @{
6092 . = 0x10;
6093 __data_start = 0x10;
6094 *(.data)
6095 @}
6096 @dots{}
6097 @}
6098 @end group
6099 @end smallexample
6100
6101 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6102 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6103 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6104 section in the second two assignments.
6105
6106 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6107 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6108
6109 @itemize @bullet
6110 @item
6111 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6112 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6113 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6114 @item
6115 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6116 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6117 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6118 @item
6119 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6120 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6121 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6122 before applying the operator.
6123 @end itemize
6124
6125 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6126
6127 @itemize @bullet
6128 @item
6129 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6130 @item
6131 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6132 @item
6133 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6134 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6135 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6136 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6137 but an absolute address otherwise.
6138 @item
6139 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6140 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6141 section as the relative operand(s).
6142 @item
6143 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6144 conversions) is an absolute address.
6145 @end itemize
6146
6147 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6148 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6149 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6150 section @samp{.data}:
6151 @smallexample
6152 SECTIONS
6153 @{
6154 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6155 @}
6156 @end smallexample
6157 @noindent
6158 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6159 @samp{.data} section.
6160
6161 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6162 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6163
6164 @node Builtin Functions
6165 @subsection Builtin Functions
6166 @cindex functions in expressions
6167 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6168 use in linker script expressions.
6169
6170 @table @code
6171 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6172 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6173 @cindex expression, absolute
6174 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6175 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6176 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6177 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6178
6179 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6180 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6181 @cindex section address in expression
6182 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6183 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6184 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6185 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6186 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6187 the other two will be absolute:
6188 @smallexample
6189 @group
6190 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6191 .output1 :
6192 @{
6193 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6194 @dots{}
6195 @}
6196 .output :
6197 @{
6198 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6199 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6200 @}
6201 @dots{} @}
6202 @end group
6203 @end smallexample
6204
6205 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6206 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6207 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6208 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6209 @cindex round up location counter
6210 @cindex align location counter
6211 @cindex round up expression
6212 @cindex align expression
6213 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6214 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6215 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6216 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6217 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6218 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6219
6220 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6221 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6222 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6223 input sections:
6224 @smallexample
6225 @group
6226 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6227 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6228 *(.data)
6229 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6230 @}
6231 @dots{} @}
6232 @end group
6233 @end smallexample
6234 @noindent
6235 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6236 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6237 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6238 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6239
6240 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6241
6242 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6243 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6244 @cindex section alignment
6245 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6246 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6247 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6248 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6249 value in that section.
6250 @smallexample
6251 @group
6252 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6253 .output @{
6254 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6255 @dots{}
6256 @}
6257 @dots{} @}
6258 @end group
6259 @end smallexample
6260
6261 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6262 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6263 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6264 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6265 section.
6266
6267 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6268 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6269 This is equivalent to either
6270 @smallexample
6271 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6272 @end smallexample
6273 or
6274 @smallexample
6275 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6276 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6277 @end smallexample
6278 @noindent
6279 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6280 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6281 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6282 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6283 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6284 bytes in the on-disk file.
6285
6286 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6287 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6288 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6289 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6290 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6291
6292 @noindent
6293 Example:
6294 @smallexample
6295 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6296 @end smallexample
6297
6298 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6299 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6300 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6301 evaluation purposes.
6302
6303 @smallexample
6304 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6305 @end smallexample
6306
6307 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6308 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6309 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6310 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6311 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6312 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6313 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6314 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6315 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6316 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6317 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6318 section alignment.
6319
6320 @smallexample
6321 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6322 @end smallexample
6323
6324 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6325 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6326 @cindex symbol defaults
6327 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6328 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6329 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6330 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6331 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6332 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6333 existed, its value is preserved:
6334
6335 @smallexample
6336 @group
6337 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6338 .text : @{
6339 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6340 @dots{}
6341 @}
6342 @dots{}
6343 @}
6344 @end group
6345 @end smallexample
6346
6347 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6348 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6349 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6350
6351 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6352 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6353 @cindex section load address in expression
6354 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6355 Section LMA}).
6356
6357 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6358 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6359 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6360 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6361
6362 @kindex MAX
6363 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6364 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6365
6366 @kindex MIN
6367 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6368 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6369
6370 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6371 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6372 @cindex unallocated address, next
6373 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6374 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6375 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6376 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6377
6378 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6379 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6380 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6381
6382 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6383 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6384 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6385 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6386 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6387 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6388 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6389 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6390 name.
6391
6392 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6393 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6394 @cindex section size
6395 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6396 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6397 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6398 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6399 @smallexample
6400 @group
6401 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6402 .output @{
6403 .start = . ;
6404 @dots{}
6405 .end = . ;
6406 @}
6407 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6408 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6409 @dots{} @}
6410 @end group
6411 @end smallexample
6412
6413 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6414 @itemx sizeof_headers
6415 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6416 @cindex header size
6417 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6418 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6419 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6420 choose, to facilitate paging.
6421
6422 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6423 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6424 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6425 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6426 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6427 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6428 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6429 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6430 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6431 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6432 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6433 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6434 @end table
6435
6436 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6437 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6438 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6439 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6440 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6441 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6442 linker will report an error.
6443
6444 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6445
6446 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6447 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6448 commands.
6449
6450 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6451 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6452 read. This can affect archive searching.
6453
6454 @ifset GENERIC
6455 @node Machine Dependent
6456 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6457
6458 @cindex machine dependencies
6459 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6460 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6461 functionality are not listed.
6462
6463 @menu
6464 @ifset H8300
6465 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6466 @end ifset
6467 @ifset I960
6468 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6469 @end ifset
6470 @ifset M68HC11
6471 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6472 @end ifset
6473 @ifset ARM
6474 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6475 @end ifset
6476 @ifset HPPA
6477 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6478 @end ifset
6479 @ifset M68K
6480 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6481 @end ifset
6482 @ifset MIPS
6483 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6484 @end ifset
6485 @ifset MMIX
6486 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6487 @end ifset
6488 @ifset MSP430
6489 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6490 @end ifset
6491 @ifset NDS32
6492 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6493 @end ifset
6494 @ifset NIOSII
6495 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6496 @end ifset
6497 @ifset POWERPC
6498 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6499 @end ifset
6500 @ifset POWERPC64
6501 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6502 @end ifset
6503 @ifset SPU
6504 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6505 @end ifset
6506 @ifset TICOFF
6507 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6508 @end ifset
6509 @ifset WIN32
6510 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6511 @end ifset
6512 @ifset XTENSA
6513 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6514 @end ifset
6515 @end menu
6516 @end ifset
6517
6518 @ifset H8300
6519 @ifclear GENERIC
6520 @raisesections
6521 @end ifclear
6522
6523 @node H8/300
6524 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6525
6526 @cindex H8/300 support
6527 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6528 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6529
6530 @table @emph
6531 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6532 @item relaxing address modes
6533 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6534 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6535 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6536 respectively.
6537
6538 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6539 @item synthesizing instructions
6540 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6541 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6542 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6543 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6544 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6545 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6546 top page of memory).
6547
6548 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6549 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6550 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6551 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6552 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6553 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6554 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6555
6556 @item bit manipulation instructions
6557 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6558 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6559 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6560 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6561 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6562 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6563 the top page of memory).
6564
6565 @item system control instructions
6566 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6567 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6568 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6569 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6570 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6571 the top page of memory).
6572 @end table
6573
6574 @ifclear GENERIC
6575 @lowersections
6576 @end ifclear
6577 @end ifset
6578
6579 @ifclear GENERIC
6580 @ifset Renesas
6581 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6582 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6583 @node Renesas
6584 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6585
6586 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6587 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6588 options are required for these chips.
6589 @end ifset
6590 @end ifclear
6591
6592 @ifset I960
6593 @ifclear GENERIC
6594 @raisesections
6595 @end ifclear
6596
6597 @node i960
6598 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6599
6600 @cindex i960 support
6601
6602 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6603 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6604 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6605 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6606 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6607 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6608 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6609
6610 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6611 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6612 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6613 the names
6614
6615 @smallexample
6616 @group
6617 try
6618 libtry.a
6619 tryca
6620 libtryca.a
6621 @end group
6622 @end smallexample
6623
6624 @noindent
6625 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6626 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6627
6628 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6629 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6630 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6631 specifies a library.
6632
6633 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6634 @cindex relaxing on i960
6635 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6636 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6637 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6638 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6639 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6640 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6641 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6642 not itself call any subroutines).
6643
6644 @ifclear GENERIC
6645 @lowersections
6646 @end ifclear
6647 @end ifset
6648
6649 @ifset ARM
6650 @ifclear GENERIC
6651 @raisesections
6652 @end ifclear
6653
6654 @ifset M68HC11
6655 @ifclear GENERIC
6656 @raisesections
6657 @end ifclear
6658
6659 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6660 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6661
6662 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6663
6664 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6665
6666 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6667 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6668
6669 @table @emph
6670 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6671 @item relaxing address modes
6672 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6673 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6674 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6675 respectively.
6676
6677 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6678 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6679 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6680
6681 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6682 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6683 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6684 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6685 @code{bset} instructions.
6686
6687 @end table
6688
6689 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6690
6691 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6692 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6693 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6694 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6695 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6696 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6697 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6698 point to the function trampoline.
6699
6700 @ifclear GENERIC
6701 @lowersections
6702 @end ifclear
6703 @end ifset
6704
6705 @node ARM
6706 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6707
6708 @cindex ARM interworking support
6709 @kindex --support-old-code
6710 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6711 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6712 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6713 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6714 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6715 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6716 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6717 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6718 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6719 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6720
6721 @cindex thumb entry point
6722 @cindex entry point, thumb
6723 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6724 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6725 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6726 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6727 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6728 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6729
6730 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6731 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6732 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6733 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6734 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6735 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6736
6737 @cindex BE8
6738 @kindex --be8
6739 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6740 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6741 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6742 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6743 little-endian code.
6744
6745 @cindex TARGET1
6746 @kindex --target1-rel
6747 @kindex --target1-abs
6748 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6749 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6750 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6751 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6752
6753 @cindex TARGET2
6754 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6755 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6756 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6757 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6758 @table @samp
6759 @item rel
6760 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6761 @item abs
6762 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6763 @item got-rel
6764 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6765 @end table
6766
6767 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6768 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6769 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6770 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6771 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6772 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6773
6774 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6775 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6776 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6777
6778 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6779 relocations are ignored.
6780
6781 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6782 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6783 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6784 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6785
6786 @smallexample
6787 TST rM, #1
6788 MOVEQ PC, rM
6789 BX Rn
6790 @end smallexample
6791
6792 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6793 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6794 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6795
6796 @cindex USE_BLX
6797 @kindex --use-blx
6798 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6799 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6800 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6801 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6802 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6803
6804 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6805 specify it if you are using that target.
6806
6807 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6808 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6809 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6810 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6811 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6812 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6813 the support code can read the intended values.
6814
6815 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6816 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6817 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6818 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6819 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6820 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6821
6822 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6823 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6824 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6825 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6826 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6827 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6828
6829 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6830 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6831 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6832 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6833 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6834 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6835 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6836
6837 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6838 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6839 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6840 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6841 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6842 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6843 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6844
6845 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6846 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6847 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6848
6849 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6850 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6851
6852 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6853 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6854 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6855 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6856 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6857 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6858 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6859 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6860
6861 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6862 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6863
6864 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6865 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6866 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6867 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6868 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6869
6870 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6871 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6872 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6873 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6874 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6875 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6876
6877 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6878 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6879
6880 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6881 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6882 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6883 occurs.
6884
6885 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6886 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6887 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6888 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6889 occurs.
6890
6891 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6892 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6893 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6894 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6895 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6896 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6897 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6898 not be diagnosed.
6899
6900 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6901 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6902 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6903 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6904 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6905 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6906 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6907
6908 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6909 @kindex --pic-veneer
6910 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6911 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6912 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6913 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6914
6915 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6916 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6917 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6918 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6919 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6920 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6921 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6922 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6923 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6924 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6925 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6926 where they should be placed.
6927
6928 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6929 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6930 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6931 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6932 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6933 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6934 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6935 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6936 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6937 from the input sections.
6938
6939 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6940 @samp{N = +1}.
6941
6942 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6943 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6944 otherwise.
6945
6946 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6947 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6948 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6949 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6950
6951 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6952
6953 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6954 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6955 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6956 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6957
6958 Please contact ARM for further details.
6959
6960 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6961 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6962 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6963 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6964
6965 @kindex --long-plt
6966 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6967 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6968 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6969 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6970
6971 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6972 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
6973 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6974 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6975
6976 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
6977 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6978 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6979 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6980 veneers in memory.
6981
6982 @kindex --cmse-implib
6983 @cindex Secure gateway import library
6984 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6985 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6986 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6987 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6988
6989 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6990 @cindex Input import library
6991 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6992 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6993 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6994 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6995 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6996 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6997 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6998 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6999 specified.
7000
7001 @ifclear GENERIC
7002 @lowersections
7003 @end ifclear
7004 @end ifset
7005
7006 @ifset HPPA
7007 @ifclear GENERIC
7008 @raisesections
7009 @end ifclear
7010
7011 @node HPPA ELF32
7012 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7013 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7014 @kindex --multi-subspace
7015 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7016 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7017 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7018 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7019 multiple sub-spaces.
7020
7021 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7022 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7023 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7024 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7025 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7026 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7027 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7028 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7029 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7030 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7031 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7032 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7033 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7034 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7035 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7036 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7037
7038 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7039 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7040 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7041 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7042
7043 @ifclear GENERIC
7044 @lowersections
7045 @end ifclear
7046 @end ifset
7047
7048 @ifset M68K
7049 @ifclear GENERIC
7050 @raisesections
7051 @end ifclear
7052
7053 @node M68K
7054 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7055
7056 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7057 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7058 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7059 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7060 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7061 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7062 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7063 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7064 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7065 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7066 support such GOTs.
7067 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7068 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7069 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7070 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7071
7072 @ifclear GENERIC
7073 @lowersections
7074 @end ifclear
7075 @end ifset
7076
7077 @ifset MIPS
7078 @ifclear GENERIC
7079 @raisesections
7080 @end ifclear
7081
7082 @node MIPS
7083 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7084
7085 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7086 @kindex --insn32
7087 @kindex --no-insn32
7088 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7089 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7090 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7091 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7092 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7093 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7094
7095 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7096 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7097 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7098 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7099 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7100 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7101 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7102 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7103 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7104 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7105 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7106 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7107
7108 @ifclear GENERIC
7109 @lowersections
7110 @end ifclear
7111 @end ifset
7112
7113 @ifset MMIX
7114 @ifclear GENERIC
7115 @raisesections
7116 @end ifclear
7117
7118 @node MMIX
7119 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7120 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7121 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7122 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7123 can translate between the two formats.
7124
7125 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7126 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7127 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7128 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7129 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7130 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7131 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7132 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7133
7134 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7135 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7136 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7137 of a section.
7138
7139 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7140 are left out from an mmo file.
7141
7142 @ifclear GENERIC
7143 @lowersections
7144 @end ifclear
7145 @end ifset
7146
7147 @ifset MSP430
7148 @ifclear GENERIC
7149 @raisesections
7150 @end ifclear
7151
7152 @node MSP430
7153 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7154 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7155 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7156 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7157
7158 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7159 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7160
7161 @table @code
7162 @item @samp{.vectors}
7163 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7164
7165 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7166 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7167 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7168
7169 @item @samp{.infomem}
7170 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7171 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7172
7173 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7174 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7175 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7176
7177 @item @samp{.noinit}
7178 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7179
7180 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7181 @end table
7182
7183 @ifclear GENERIC
7184 @lowersections
7185 @end ifclear
7186 @end ifset
7187
7188 @ifset NDS32
7189 @ifclear GENERIC
7190 @raisesections
7191 @end ifclear
7192
7193 @node NDS32
7194 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7195 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7196 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7197 relaxes objects according to these options.
7198
7199 @table @code
7200 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7201 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7202
7203 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7204 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7205
7206 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7207 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7208
7209 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7210 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7211
7212 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7213 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7214
7215 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7216 Update the existing EX9 table.
7217
7218 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7219 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7220
7221 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7222 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7223
7224 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7225 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7226
7227 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7228 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7229 @end table
7230
7231 @ifclear GENERIC
7232 @lowersections
7233 @end ifclear
7234 @end ifset
7235
7236 @ifset NIOSII
7237 @ifclear GENERIC
7238 @raisesections
7239 @end ifclear
7240
7241 @node Nios II
7242 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7243 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7244 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7245
7246 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7247 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7248 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7249 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7250 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7251 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7252 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7253 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7254 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7255 larger than 256MB.
7256
7257 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7258 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7259 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7260 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7261 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7262 register as a temporary.
7263
7264 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7265 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7266 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7267
7268 @ifclear GENERIC
7269 @lowersections
7270 @end ifclear
7271 @end ifset
7272
7273 @ifset POWERPC
7274 @ifclear GENERIC
7275 @raisesections
7276 @end ifclear
7277
7278 @node PowerPC ELF32
7279 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7280 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7281 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7282 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7283 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7284 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7285 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7286 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7287 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7288 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7289 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7290 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7291 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7292
7293 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7294 @table @option
7295 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7296 @kindex --bss-plt
7297 @item --bss-plt
7298 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7299 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7300 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7301 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7302 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7303 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7304 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7305 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7306
7307 @kindex --secure-plt
7308 @item --secure-plt
7309 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7310 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7311 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7312 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7313 style BSS PLT.
7314
7315 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7316 @kindex --sdata-got
7317 @item --sdata-got
7318 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7319 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7320 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7321 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7322 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7323 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7324 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7325 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7326 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7327 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7328 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7329 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7330
7331 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7332 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7333 @item --emit-stub-syms
7334 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7335 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7336
7337 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7338 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7339 @item --no-tls-optimize
7340 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7341 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7342 disable the optimization.
7343 @end table
7344
7345 @ifclear GENERIC
7346 @lowersections
7347 @end ifclear
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 @ifset POWERPC64
7351 @ifclear GENERIC
7352 @raisesections
7353 @end ifclear
7354
7355 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7356 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7357
7358 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7359 @table @option
7360 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7361 @kindex --stub-group-size
7362 @item --stub-group-size
7363 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7364 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7365 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7366 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7367 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7368 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7369 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7370 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7371 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7372 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7373 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7374 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7375 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7376 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7377
7378 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7379 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7380 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7381 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7382
7383 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7384 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7385 @item --emit-stub-syms
7386 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7387 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7388
7389 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7390 @kindex --dotsyms
7391 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7392 @item --dotsyms
7393 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7394 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7395 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7396 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7397 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7398 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7399 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7400 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7401 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7402 feature.
7403
7404 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7405 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7406 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7407 @item --save-restore-funcs
7408 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7409 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7410 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7411 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7412 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7413 link.
7414
7415 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7416 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7417 @item --no-tls-optimize
7418 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7419 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7420 disable the optimization.
7421
7422 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7423 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7424 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7425 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7426 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7427 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7428 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7429 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7430 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7431 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7432 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7433 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7434 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7435 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7436 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7437
7438 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7439 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7440 @item --no-opd-optimize
7441 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7442 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7443 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7444 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7445
7446 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7447 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7448 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7449 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7450 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7451 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7452 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7453
7454 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7455 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7456 @item --no-toc-optimize
7457 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7458 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7459 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7460 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7461 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7462 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7463 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7464 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7465 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7466 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7467 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7468 optimization.
7469
7470 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7471 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7472 @item --no-multi-toc
7473 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7474 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7475 where TOC
7476 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7477 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7478 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7479 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7480 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7481 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7482 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7483 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7484
7485 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7486 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7487 @item --no-toc-sort
7488 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7489 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7490 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7491 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7492 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7493 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7494 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7495 off this feature.
7496
7497 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7498 @kindex --plt-align
7499 @kindex --no-plt-align
7500 @item --plt-align
7501 @itemx --no-plt-align
7502 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7503 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7504 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7505 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7506 stubs are packed tightly.
7507
7508 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7509 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7510 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7511 @item --plt-static-chain
7512 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7513 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7514 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7515 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7516
7517 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7518 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7519 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7520 @item --plt-thread-safe
7521 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7522 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7523 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7524 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7525 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7526 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7527 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7528 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7529 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7530 default behaviour.
7531 @end table
7532
7533 @ifclear GENERIC
7534 @lowersections
7535 @end ifclear
7536 @end ifset
7537
7538 @ifset SPU
7539 @ifclear GENERIC
7540 @raisesections
7541 @end ifclear
7542
7543 @node SPU ELF
7544 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7545
7546 @cindex SPU ELF options
7547 @table @option
7548
7549 @cindex SPU plugins
7550 @kindex --plugin
7551 @item --plugin
7552 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7553
7554 @cindex SPU overlays
7555 @kindex --no-overlays
7556 @item --no-overlays
7557 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7558 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7559 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7560 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7561
7562 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7563 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7564 @item --emit-stub-syms
7565 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7566 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7567
7568 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7569 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7570 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7571 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7572 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7573 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7574
7575 @cindex SPU local store size
7576 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7577 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7578 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7579 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7580 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7581
7582 @cindex SPU
7583 @kindex --stack-analysis
7584 @item --stack-analysis
7585 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7586 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7587 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7588 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7589 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7590 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7591 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7592 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7593 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7594 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7595 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7596 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7597 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7598 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7599 and calls will be given.
7600
7601 @cindex SPU
7602 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7603 @item --emit-stack-syms
7604 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7605 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7606 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7607 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7608 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7609 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7610 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7611 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7612 @end table
7613
7614 @ifclear GENERIC
7615 @lowersections
7616 @end ifclear
7617 @end ifset
7618
7619 @ifset TICOFF
7620 @ifclear GENERIC
7621 @raisesections
7622 @end ifclear
7623
7624 @node TI COFF
7625 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7626 @cindex TI COFF versions
7627 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7628 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7629 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7630 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7631 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7632 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7633
7634 @ifclear GENERIC
7635 @lowersections
7636 @end ifclear
7637 @end ifset
7638
7639 @ifset WIN32
7640 @ifclear GENERIC
7641 @raisesections
7642 @end ifclear
7643
7644 @node WIN32
7645 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7646
7647 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7648 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7649 command line options mentioned here.
7650
7651 @table @emph
7652 @cindex import libraries
7653 @item import libraries
7654 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7655 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7656 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7657 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7658 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7659 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7660
7661 @item exporting DLL symbols
7662 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7663 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7664
7665 @table @emph
7666 @item using auto-export functionality
7667 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7668 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7669 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7670
7671 @itemize
7672 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7673 @item --exclude-symbols
7674 @item --exclude-libs
7675 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7676 @item --version-script
7677 @end itemize
7678
7679 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7680 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7681 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7682 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7683 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7684 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7685 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7686 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7687
7688 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7689 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7690 if either of the following are true:
7691
7692 @itemize
7693 @item A DEF file is used.
7694 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7695 @end itemize
7696
7697 @item using a DEF file
7698 @cindex using a DEF file
7699 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7700 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7701 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7702 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7703 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7704
7705 @example
7706 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7707 @end example
7708
7709 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7710 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7711
7712 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7713
7714 @example
7715 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7716
7717 EXPORTS
7718 foo
7719 bar
7720 _bar = bar
7721 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7722 var1 DATA
7723 doo = foo == foo2
7724 eoo DATA == var1
7725 @end example
7726
7727 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7728 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7729 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7730 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7731 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7732 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7733 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7734 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7735 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7736
7737 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7738 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7739 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7740
7741 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7742 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7743 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7744 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7745
7746 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7747 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7748 non-default base address for the image.
7749
7750 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7751 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7752 filename specified on the command line.
7753
7754 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7755
7756 @example
7757 EXPORTS
7758 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7759 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7760 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7761 @end example
7762
7763 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7764 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7765 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7766 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7767 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7768 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7769 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7770
7771 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7772
7773 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7774 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7775 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7776 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7777 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7778
7779 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7780 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7781 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7782 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7783
7784 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7785 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7786 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7787 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7788 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7789 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7790 application will behave unexpectedly.
7791
7792 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7793 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7794 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7795 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7796 the DLL without an import library.
7797
7798 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7799 other DEF file statements
7800
7801 @cindex creating a DEF file
7802 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7803 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7804
7805 @item Using decorations
7806 @cindex Using decorations
7807 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7808 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7809 declared as:
7810
7811 @example
7812 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7813 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7814 @end example
7815
7816 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7817 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7818 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7819 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7820
7821 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7822 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7823 instead:
7824
7825 @example
7826 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7827 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7828 @end example
7829
7830 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7831 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7832 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7833 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7834 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7835 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7836 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7837 information.
7838 @end table
7839
7840 @cindex automatic data imports
7841 @item automatic data imports
7842 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7843 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7844 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7845 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7846 code to these platforms, especially for large
7847 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7848 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7849 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7850 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7851 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7852 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7853 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7854 trigger the feature's use.
7855
7856 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7857 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7858
7859 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7860 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7861
7862 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7863 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7864 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7865 below.
7866
7867 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7868 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7869 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7870 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7871 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7872 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7873 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7874 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7875 references.
7876
7877 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7878 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7879 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7880 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7881 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7882 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7883 run without error on an older system.
7884
7885 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7886 enabled as needed.
7887
7888 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7889 @item direct linking to a dll
7890 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7891 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7892 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7893 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7894 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7895 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7896 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7897 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7898 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7899 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7900
7901 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7902 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7903 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7904 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7905 select the dll instead of an import library.
7906
7907
7908 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7909 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7910
7911 @example
7912 libxxx.dll.a
7913 xxx.dll.a
7914 libxxx.a
7915 xxx.lib
7916 cygxxx.dll (*)
7917 libxxx.dll
7918 xxx.dll
7919 @end example
7920
7921 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7922
7923 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7924 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7925 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7926 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7927 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7928
7929 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7930 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7931 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7932 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7933 could coexist on the same machine.
7934
7935 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7936 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7937 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7938
7939 @example
7940 bin/
7941 cygxxx.dll
7942 lib/
7943 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7944 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7945 @end example
7946
7947 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7948 done two ways:
7949
7950 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7951 @example
7952 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7953 @end example
7954
7955 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7956 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7957 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7958 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7959
7960 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7961 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7962 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7963 making the app/dll.
7964
7965 @example
7966 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7967 @end example
7968
7969 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7970
7971 @example
7972 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7973 @end example
7974
7975 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7976 perfectly legal
7977
7978 @example
7979 bin/
7980 cygxxx-5.dll
7981 lib/
7982 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7983 @end example
7984
7985 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7986 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7987 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7988
7989 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7990 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7991
7992 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7993 work with auto-imported data.
7994
7995 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7996 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7997 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7998 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7999 possible to do this without an import lib.
8000
8001 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8002 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8003 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8004 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8005
8006 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8007 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8008 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8009 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8010 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8011 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8012 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8013
8014 @item symbol aliasing
8015 @table @emph
8016 @item adding additional names
8017 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8018 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8019 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8020 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8021 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8022
8023 @example
8024 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8025
8026 EXPORTS
8027 foo
8028 _foo = foo
8029 @end example
8030
8031 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8032
8033 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8034 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8035
8036 @example
8037 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8038 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8039 @end example
8040
8041 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8042 symbols.
8043
8044 @item renaming symbols
8045 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8046 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8047 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8048 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8049 created). In the following example:
8050
8051 @example
8052 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8053
8054 EXPORTS
8055 _foo = foo
8056 @end example
8057
8058 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8059 @samp{_foo}.
8060 @end table
8061
8062 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8063 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8064 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8065 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8066 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8067 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8068 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8069 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8070 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8071 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8072 which is probably not what you wanted.
8073
8074 @cindex weak externals
8075 @item weak externals
8076 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8077 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8078 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8079 are three variants of weak externals:
8080 @itemize
8081 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8082 called lazy externals.
8083 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8084 This form is not presently implemented.
8085 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8086 implemented.
8087 @end itemize
8088 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8089 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8090 uses a default value.
8091
8092 @cindex aligned common symbols
8093 @item aligned common symbols
8094 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8095 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8096 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8097 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8098 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8099 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8100 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8101 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8102
8103 @end table
8104
8105 @ifclear GENERIC
8106 @lowersections
8107 @end ifclear
8108 @end ifset
8109
8110 @ifset XTENSA
8111 @ifclear GENERIC
8112 @raisesections
8113 @end ifclear
8114
8115 @node Xtensa
8116 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8117
8118 @cindex Xtensa processors
8119 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8120 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8121 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8122 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8123 example, with the command:
8124
8125 @smallexample
8126 SECTIONS
8127 @{
8128 .text : @{
8129 *(.literal .text)
8130 @}
8131 @}
8132 @end smallexample
8133
8134 @noindent
8135 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8136 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8137 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8138 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8139 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8140 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8141 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8142
8143 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8144 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8145 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8146 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8147 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8148 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8149 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8150 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8151 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8152 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8153 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8154 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8155
8156 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8157 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8158 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8159 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8160 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8161 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8162 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8163 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8164 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8165 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8166 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8167 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8168 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8169 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8170
8171 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8172 control the linker:
8173
8174 @cindex Xtensa options
8175 @table @option
8176 @item --size-opt
8177 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8178 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8179 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8180 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8181 preserve the correctness of the code.
8182 @end table
8183
8184 @ifclear GENERIC
8185 @lowersections
8186 @end ifclear
8187 @end ifset
8188
8189 @ifclear SingleFormat
8190 @node BFD
8191 @chapter BFD
8192
8193 @cindex back end
8194 @cindex object file management
8195 @cindex object formats available
8196 @kindex objdump -i
8197 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8198 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8199 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8200 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8201 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8202 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8203 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8204 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8205 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8206
8207 @cindex BFD requirements
8208 @cindex requirements for BFD
8209 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8210 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8211 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8212 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8213 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8214 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8215 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8216
8217 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8218 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8219 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8220 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8221
8222 @menu
8223 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8224 @end menu
8225
8226 @node BFD outline
8227 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8228 @cindex opening object files
8229 @include bfdsumm.texi
8230 @end ifclear
8231
8232 @node Reporting Bugs
8233 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8234 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8235 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8236
8237 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8238
8239 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8240 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8241 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8242 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8243 @command{ld}.
8244
8245 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8246 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8247
8248 @menu
8249 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8250 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8251 @end menu
8252
8253 @node Bug Criteria
8254 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8255 @cindex bug criteria
8256
8257 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8258
8259 @itemize @bullet
8260 @cindex fatal signal
8261 @cindex linker crash
8262 @cindex crash of linker
8263 @item
8264 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8265 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8266
8267 @cindex error on valid input
8268 @item
8269 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8270
8271 @cindex invalid input
8272 @item
8273 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8274 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8275 object files are correct.
8276
8277 @item
8278 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8279 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8280 @end itemize
8281
8282 @node Bug Reporting
8283 @section How to Report Bugs
8284 @cindex bug reports
8285 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8286
8287 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8288 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8289 recommend you contact that organization first.
8290
8291 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8292 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8293 distribution.
8294
8295 @ifset BUGURL
8296 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8297 @value{BUGURL}.
8298 @end ifset
8299
8300 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8301 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8302 fact or leave it out, state it!
8303
8304 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8305 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8306 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8307 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8308 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8309 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8310 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8311 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8312 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8313 and the most helpful.
8314
8315 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8316 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8317 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8318
8319 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8320 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8321 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8322 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8323
8324 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8325
8326 @itemize @bullet
8327 @item
8328 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8329 the @samp{--version} argument.
8330
8331 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8332 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8333
8334 @item
8335 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8336 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8337
8338 @item
8339 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8340 version number.
8341
8342 @item
8343 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8344 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8345
8346 @item
8347 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8348 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8349 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8350 sufficient.
8351
8352 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8353 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8354
8355 @item
8356 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8357 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8358 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8359 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8360 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8361 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8362 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8363 attachments are best.
8364
8365 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8366 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8367 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8368 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8369 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8370
8371 @item
8372 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8373 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8374
8375 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8376 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8377 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8378 a chance to make a mistake.
8379
8380 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8381 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8382 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8383 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8384 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8385 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8386 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8387 any conclusion from our observations.
8388
8389 @item
8390 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8391 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8392 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8393 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8394 context, not by line number.
8395
8396 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8397 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8398 @end itemize
8399
8400 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8401
8402 @itemize @bullet
8403 @item
8404 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8405
8406 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8407 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8408 changes will not affect it.
8409
8410 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8411 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8412 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8413 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8414
8415 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8416 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8417 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8418 less time, and so on.
8419
8420 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8421 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8422
8423 @item
8424 A patch for the bug.
8425
8426 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8427 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8428 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8429 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8430
8431 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8432 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8433 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8434 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8435 fixed.
8436
8437 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8438 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8439 help us to understand.
8440
8441 @item
8442 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8443
8444 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8445 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8446 @end itemize
8447
8448 @node MRI
8449 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8450 @cindex MRI compatibility
8451 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8452 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8453 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8454 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8455 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8456 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8457 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8458
8459 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8460 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8461 features to make use of them.
8462
8463 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8464 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8465
8466 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8467 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8468 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8469 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8470 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8471
8472 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8473
8474 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8475 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8476 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8477
8478 @table @code
8479 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8480 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8481 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8482 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8483 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8484 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8485 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8486 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8487 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8488 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8489 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8490
8491 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8492 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8493 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8494 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8495
8496 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8497
8498 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8499 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8500 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8501 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8502
8503 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8504 @item BASE @var{expression}
8505 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8506 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8507
8508 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8509 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8510 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8511 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8512
8513 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8514 @item END
8515 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8516
8517 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8518 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8519 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8520 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8521
8522 @enumerate
8523 @item
8524 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8525
8526 @item
8527 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8528
8529 @item
8530 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8531 @samp{COFF}
8532 @end enumerate
8533
8534 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8535 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8536 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8537 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8538
8539 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8540 same line, with no change in its effect.
8541
8542 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8543 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8544 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8545 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8546 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8547 command line.
8548
8549 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8550 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8551 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8552 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8553 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8554
8555 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8556 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8557 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8558 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8559 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8560 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8561 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8562 file, in the order specified.
8563
8564 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8565 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8566 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8567 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8568 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8569 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8570
8571 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8572 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8573 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8574 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8575 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8576 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8577 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8578 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8579 @end table
8580
8581 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8582 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8583 @include fdl.texi
8584
8585 @node LD Index
8586 @unnumbered LD Index
8587
8588 @printindex cp
8589
8590 @tex
8591 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8592 % meantime:
8593 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8594 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8595 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8596 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8597 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8598 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8599 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8600 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8601 \page\colophon
8602 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8603 @end tex
8604
8605 @bye